Canon ImageRUNNER 5000 User Guide

Series
Users Guide
imageRUNNER 5000 Series
PREFACE Thank you for purchasing the Canon imageRUNNER 5000 Series. This Manual describes the method of using the imageRUNNER 5000 Series, its Copy and Mail Box functions, and the parts that are common to each function. Please read this manual thoroughly before operating the imageRUNNER 5000 Series in order to familiarize yourself with its capabilities, and to make the most of its many functions. After reading this manual store it in a safe place for future reference.
CAUTION:
In this manual, CAUTION MESSAGES with this symbol indicate that neglecting the suggested procedure or practice could result in personal injury.
NOTICE:
Considerable effort has been made to ensure that this manual is free of inaccuracies and omissions. However, as we are constantly improving our products, some of the data contained herein may not exactly reect the current model of the particular product with which this manual has been included. If you have a need for an exact specication, please contact Canon for the current specication. This document contains proprietary information which is protected by copyright. All rights are reserved. No part of this document may be photocopied, reproduced, or translated into another language without prior written consent of Canon Inc. Copyright 2000 Canon Inc. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
International Energy Star-Program

As an ENERGY STAR Partner, Canon USA, Inc. has determined that this copier model meets the ENERGY STAR Program for energy efciency. The International ENERGY STAR Ofce Equipment Program is an international program that promotes energy saving through the use of computers and other ofce equipment. The program backs the development and dissemination of products with functions that effectively reduce energy consumption. It is an open system in which business proprietors can participate voluntarily. The targeted products are ofce equipment such as computers, displays, printers, facsimiles, and copiers. Their standards and logos are uniform among participating nations.
Note:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the Operators Manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. Do not make any changes or modications to the equipment unless otherwise specied in the manual. If such changes or modications should be made, you could be required to stop operation of the equipment.
How This Manual is Organized

Before You Start Using This Machine
CHAPTER
This chapter describes the name and function of each part of the machine, and also the method of placing an original after switching ON the machine.
Basic Copying
CHAPTER
This chapter describes the basic copy functions.
Useful Copy Functions

CHAPTER
This chapter describes more advanced copy functions.
Using the Mail Box Functions

CHAPTER
This chapter describes the Mail Box functions that enable you to temporarily store or print data.
Printing Efciently
CHAPTER
This chapter describes how to make the next copy, or a print from another function, while a print is being made, how to check the printing status, and how to change or cancel printing.
Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your Needs

CHAPTER
This chapter describes the default settings and how to change them to suit your needs.
Loading Paper and Adding Toner

CHAPTER
This chapter describes how to load paper and add toner.
Troubleshooting
CHAPTER
This chapter describes what to do when there is a paper jam or a problem with print quality.
Handling Options
CHAPTER
This chapter describes the use of options and what to do if there is a paper jam in an optional unit.
CHAPTER
Operation When User Restrictions are Enabled and How to Enter Alphabet Characters
This chapter describes how to use the Control Card, enter characters, etc.
Appendix
CHAPTER
This chapter describes the specications of this machine and optional units, index, etc.
Some information in this manual is also relevant when using the Printer functions etc. of the imageRUNNER 5000 Series. Please use this manual in combination with the other manuals (printer manual etc.) when using the printer functions.
How This Manual is Organized
Safety Information
A. Laser Safety This Product complies with 21 CFR Chapter 1 Subchapter J as a Class 1 laser product under the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. This means that the Product does not produce hazardous laser radiation. Since radiation emitted inside the Product is completely conned within protective housings and external covers, the laser beam can not escape from the machine during any phase of user operation. B. CDRH Regulations The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration implemented regulations for laser products on August 2, 1976. These regulations apply to laser products manufactured from August 1, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States. The label shown below indicates compliance with the CDRH regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed in the United States. DANGER: VORSICHT: INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN. AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM. UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG, WENN ABDECKUNG GEFNET UND SICHERHEITSVERRIEGELUNG ERBRKT NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN. INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN. AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM. RAYONNEMENT LASER EN CAS DOUVERTURE EXPOSITION DANGEREUSE AU FAISCEAU.
CAUTION: ATTENTION:
CAUTION
Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specied in the manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
CANON INC. 3-30-2 SHIMOMARUKO, OHTA-KU, TOKYO, JAPAN CANON U.S.A., INC ONE CANON PLAZA, LAKE SUCCESS, N.Y. 11042, U.S.A. CANON CANADA INC. 6390 DIXIE ROAD MISSISSAUGA, ONTARIO L5T, 1P7, CANADA MANUFACTURED: THIS PRODUCT CONFORMS WITH DHHS RADIATION PERFORMANCE STANDARD, 21 CFR CHAPTER 1 SUBCHAPTER J.
Safety Information
Functions of This Machine and Related Manuals

This machine can also be used in a network or as a printer, when the Network Multi-PDL Printer Kit (option) is attached. Refer to the instruction manual for the relevant function as well as this manual. IMPORTANT
You can use the Remote UI when the Network Multi-PDL Printer Kit is attached. The Printer function may be attached as standard depending on the system conguration.
How to Use this Machine Troubleshooting
Users Guide
(This Document)
For Remote UI Use
Remote UI Guide Setup Guide PS/PCL Reference Guide PS Driver Guide PCL Driver Guide Network Guide
For setting up the network connection & installing the CD-ROM software
For Postscript/PCL Use
For Installing the Printer Driver, etc
For Installing the Printer Driver, etc
For Connecting and Setting the Network
The manuals supplied with option equipment are included in the list above. Depending on the system conguration and product purchased, some manuals may be unavailable (irrelevant). Specications are subject to change without notice for product improvement or future release.
Functions of This Machine and Related Manuals
Operation of the Machine and Terms Used in This Manual

This machine makes effective use of a memory in order to perform print operations efciently. For example, as soon as the machine has scanned the original that you want to copy, it can scan the next persons original to make a copy without any need to wait. You can also print from this machine by using a function other than the Copy function. In this machine, these operations take place in a complex way, so not only copies but also various kinds of prints may sometimes have to wait their turn before they can be output. To avoid confusion when reading this manual, the terms scanning, printing and copying used in this manual are dened as set out below. There are some cases in which the scanning of an original when making a copy, and the process of making a print are described separately.
Scanning:
Scanning an original to be copied, or scanning an original to be stored as data in a box.
Printing:
Outputting a copy, outputting data stored in a box, or outputting data sent from a personal computer to the machine.
Copying:
Printing data scanned from an original, followed by finishing (stapling, etc.).
Operation of the Machine and Terms Used in This Manual
Table of Contents
How This Manual is Organized. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Safety Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Functions of This Machine and Related Manuals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Operation of the Machine and Terms Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 How to Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Symbols Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance and Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Consumables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warning Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Avoid Installing the Machine in the Following Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select a Safe Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Provide Adequate Installation Space. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving the Machine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 17 18 20 22 24 25 28 28 30 30 30
Periodic Inspection of the Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Handling Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Legal Limitations on Scanner Usage and the Use and Printing of Scanned Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 What the imageRUNNER 5000 Series Can Do . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Various Kinds of Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . You can Store Data and Print it at Your Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . You can Check, Change, and Cancel the Print Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Specications According to the Method of Use. . . . . . . . . . . Displaying a Guide Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . You can Read the Messages From the System Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . Functions that Conserve Power Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Energy Saver Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low-Power Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sleep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quiet Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Daily Timer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Other Useful Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto Drawer Switching Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto Clear Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy Waiting Time Display Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Paper Supply Indicator Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Paper Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 33 40 42 43 44 45 46 46 46 46 47 47 48 48 48 48 49 49
Table of Contents
Chapter 1

Parts and Their Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2 External View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2 Internal View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3 Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4 Control Panel Parts and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4 Main Power and Control Panel Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6 Turning the Power ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6 Control Panel Power Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-8 Using the Touch Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-9 Frequently-used Keys on the Touch Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-9 Touch Panel Key Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10 Adjusting the Brightness of the Touch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10 Placing Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-11 Orientation of Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12 Placing an Original on the Platen Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13 Placing Originals in the Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15 Available Paper Stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17
Chapter 2
Basic Copying
Flow of Copy Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3 Canceling a Copy Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7 Canceling from the Touch Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7 Canceling with the Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
Stop
Selecting the Copy Paper Size (Paper Select) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9 Automatic Paper Selection (Auto) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9 Manual Paper Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10 Making Copies Using the Stack Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12 Changing the Copy Ratio (Copy Ratio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16 Enlarging/ Reducing Originals to a Standard Size (Preset Zoom). . . . .2-16 Specifying the Copy Ratio by % (Zoom Designation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18 Automatically Setting the Copy Ratio Based on the Original and Copy Paper Sizes (Auto) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20 Slightly Reducing Images to Prevent the Original Periphery from Being Cut (Entire Image) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22 Calculating the Copy Ratio Based on the Original and Copy Paper Sizes (Zoom Program) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23 Enlarging/Reducing Originals with Copy Ratios Set Independently for X and Y Axes (XY Zoom) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28 Adjusting Exposure and Image Quality (Copy Exposure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32 Adjusting Copy Exposure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32 Selecting Image Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33 Automatic Adjustment of Exposure and Image Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35
Table of Contents
Entering the Copy Quantity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36 Specifying the Required Number of Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36 Changing the Copy Quantity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37 Two-sided Copying (Two-sided Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38 Making Two-sided Copies from One-sided Originals (1 2-Sided) . . . . . 2-38 Making Two-sided Copies from Two-sided Originals (2 2-Sided) . . . . . 2-40 Making One-sided Copies from Two-sided Originals (2 1-Sided) . . . . . 2-43 Making Two-sided Copies from Facing Pages in a Book (Book 2-Sided). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45 Collating Copies (Finisher) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48 Checking a Sample Set Before Copying (Sample Set) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54 Checking the Copy Mode Settings (Setting Conrmation). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56 Changing or Canceling a Selected Copy Mode (Setting Conrmation/Cancel). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
Chapter 3

Making Copies of Facing Pages in a Book onto Two Separate Copy Sheets (Two-page Separation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Adding Front and Back Covers, Insertion Sheets and Chapter Pages to Copy Sets (Cover/Sheet Insertion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Making Copies for Use as a Booklet (Booklet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Making Copies with Sheets of Paper Interleaved between Transparencies (Transparency Interleaving). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Making Copies with Original Image Shifted (Shift) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Making Copies with Original Image Shifted to the Center or a Corner . 3-17 Making Copies with Original Image Using the Numeric Keys . . . . . . . . 3-18 Making Copies with Margins (Margin) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 Erasing Shadows and Frame Lines from Copies (Frame Erase) . . . . . . . . . 3-24 Making Copies Erasing the Frame of the Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26 Making Copies Erasing the Book Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28 Making Copies Erasing Binding holes etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31 Reducing Two, Four or Eight Originals to Fit on a Single Copy Sheet (Image Combination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33 Dividing an Original Into Equal Sections and Enlarging Each Section on a Separate Copy Sheet (Image Separation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38 Feeding Different-size Originals Together in the Feeder (Different Size Originals) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43 Copying Separately-Set Originals (Job Build) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45 Storing/ Recalling Often Used Copy Settings in Memory (Mode Memory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48 Storing Copy Settings for a Copy Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48 Storing a Memory Key Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51 Recalling a Copy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53 Erasing a Copy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
Table of Contents
Recalling a Previous Copy Job (Recall) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-58 Inverting Original Images (Nega/Posi). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-60 Making Copies with the Original Image Repeated (Image Repeat) . . . . . . .3-62 Making Copies with Image Reversed (Mirror Image). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-65 Making Sharp Contrast Copies (Sharpness). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-67
Chapter 4

Flow of Mail Box Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3 Storing Originals in the Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3 Printing Documents Stored in the Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6 Scanning Originals into a Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9 Giving a Name to the Document to be Scanned (Document Name) . . . .4-9 Specifying Document Size (Doc. Size Select) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10 Adjusting the Exposure and Image Quality before Scanning the Originals (Scanning Exposure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11 Changing the Scanning Ratio (Copy Ratio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15 Scanning Two-sided Originals (Two-sided Original). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-25 Scanning Facing Pages in a Book onto Two Separate Sheets in One Step (Two-page Separation). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27 Scanning Originals for Use as a Booklet (Booklet Scanning) . . . . . . . .4-28 Erasing Shadows and Frame Lines (Frame Erase) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-31 Reducing Two, Four or Eight Originals to Fit on a Single Print Sheet and Storing it (Image Combination). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-39 Scanning Different-size Originals Together in the Feeder (Different Size Originals) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-43 Scanning Originals Separately Set as One Document (Job Build) . . . .4-45 Inverting Original Images (Nega/Posi) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-47 Scanning Originals after Making them Sharply Contrasted (Sharpness) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-49 Storing/ Recalling Scanning Modes (Mode Memory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-51 Printing a Document Stored, in a Box after Changing the Settings . . .4-61 Selecting the Print Paper Size (Paper Select) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-61 Collating Prints (Finisher). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-63 Two-sided Printing (Two-sided Printing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-67 Adding Job Separator Sheets, Front and Back Covers to Printed Sets (Cover/Job Separator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-69 Making Prints for Use as a Booklet (Booklet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-72 Printing Multiple Documents as One Document (Merge Documents) . .4-75 Storing/ Recalling Often Used Print Setting in Memory (Mode Memory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-77 Checking the Print Result or the Image of the Stored Document (Sample Print). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-88 Checking the Documents Detailed Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-90 Changing the Name of a Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-91 Moving a Document. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-93
10
Table of Contents
Erasing a Document from a Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95
Chapter 5
Printing Efciently
Changing the Exposure During Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Interrupting the Current Job to Make Priority Copies (Interrupt Mode). 5-3 Reserving a Job while the Machine is Warming Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Making a Copy Reservation while the Machine is Warming Up (Auto Start) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Reserving a Print Job of a Document Stored in a Box while the Machine is Warming Up (Auto Print) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Reserving the Next Job during Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Reserving a Copy Operation during Printing (Reserve Copy) . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Reserving a Box Print while Printing (Reserve Print) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Using the Stack Bypass while Reserving Print Jobs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Checking and Changing Printing Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Checking Detailed Information for Printing Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Canceling Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 Priority Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 Operating Print Jobs Sent from a Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Printing Secured Documents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 Checking and Canceling Spool Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 Checking the Printing History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 Checking the Device Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Chapter 6

Additional Functions Settings Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Setting Specications that are Common to Each Function (Common Settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Selecting the Initial Function at Power ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Selecting the Default Display After Auto Clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Setting Entry Tone, Error Tone, Job Done Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Setting Inch Input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 Setting a Paper Drawer for Auto Paper Selection/ Auto Drawer Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10 Identifying the Type of Paper in a Paper Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12 Changing the Energy Saver Mode Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14 Setting the Functions Keys as keys to Reactivate the Machine . . . . . . 6-15 Setting the Energy Consumption in the Sleep Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 Distinguishing LTRR-Size and STMT-Size Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16 Setting a Dedicated Tray for Each Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17 Setting the Printing Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18 Setting the Standard Paper for the Stack bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19 Setting a Standard Mode for Local Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21 Returning the Common Settings to Their Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Table of Contents
11
Setting the Timer (Timer Settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-24 Setting the Current Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-24 Setting the Time to Initiate Auto Sleep after Finishing Operations. . . . .6-26 Setting the Time Taken for Display to Return to Basic Screen after Finishing Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-27 Setting the Time Taken for the Unit to Quiet Down after Last Task . . . .6-28 Setting the Time That the Units Power Turns OFF on Different Days of the Week . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-29 Setting the Low-Power Mode Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-30 Adjusting the Machine (Adjustment/Cleaning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-31 Fine-adjusting Zoom When Differences in Original Image and Print Image Occur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-31 Staple Repositioning for Saddle Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-32 Changing the Saddle Stitch Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-33 Adjusting the Standard Exposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-34 Setting Specications of the Copy Function (Copy Settings). . . . . . . .6-35 Setting Standard Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-35 Setting Automatic Collate On/ Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-37 Setting Image Orientation Priority to On/ Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-38 Setting the Job Duration Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-39 Setting Auto Orientation to On/ Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-40 Setting the Photo Mode of the Copy Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-41 Changing the Current Standard Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-42 Restoring Settings to Default Copy Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-45 Setting Specications of the Mail Box Function (Mail Box Settings) . .6-46 Setting/ Storing the Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-46 Initializing a Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-49 Setting the Photo Mode of the Mail Box Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-51 Setting the Standard mode for Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-52 Setting Specications of the System Management ID (System Settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-55 Setting/ Changing the System Manager ID and Password . . . . . . . . . .6-55 Setting the Department ID Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-58 Setting Device Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-72 Erasing a Message Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-73 Setting the Auto Ofine On/Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-74 Printing the Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-75 Printing the Contents of the Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-75
Chapter 7

Loading Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2 Loading Paper in the Paper Drawers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2 Adjusting a Paper Drawer to Hold a Different Paper Size . . . . . . . . . . . .7-6 Adding Toner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-8 Consumables and Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12 Consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12
12
Table of Contents
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Chapter 8
Troubleshooting
Removing Paper Jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 Display Indicating How to Clear the Jam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 Removing Paper Jams in the Main Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Removing Paper Jams in the Right Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 Removing Paper Jams in Paper Drawer 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 Removing Paper Jams in Paper Drawer 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15 Removing Paper Jams in Paper Drawer 3 or 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18 Removing Paper Jams in the Stack Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20 Removing Paper Jams in the Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22 Routine Cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25 Cleaning the Platen Glass/ Rear Side of Platen Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25 Cleaning the Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26 Original Scanned Using the Feeder Becomes Dirty (Feeder Cleaning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30 Output Sheets are Dirty (Wire Cleaning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31 Self-diagnostic (Error) Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32 If Memory Becomes Full During Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35 When the Power does not Turn ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36 Service Call Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
Chapter 9
Handling Options
System Conguration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Paper Deck-G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Parts and Their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Removing Paper Jams in the Paper Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Loading Paper in the Paper Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Finisher-F1/ Saddle Finisher-F2/ Puncher Unit-B1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Parts and Their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Collate Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Group Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Offset Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Staple Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Saddle Stitching Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11 Punch Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12 Removing Paper Jams in the Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13 Replacing the Staple Case in the Stapler Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15 Removing Jammed Staples from the Stapler Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18 Removing Paper Jams in the Saddle Stitcher Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21 Replacing the Saddle Stitcher Unit Staple Cartridge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24 Removing Jammed Staples from the Saddle Stitcher Unit . . . . . . . . . . 9-26 Removing Paper Jams in the Puncher Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Table of Contents
13
Removing Punch Waste. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32 Consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33 Copy Tray-C3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34 Parts and Their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34 Removing Paper Jams in the Copy Tray-C3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35
Chapter 10
Operation When User Restrictions Are Enabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Inserting the Control Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Operations before Using Copy or Mail Box Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3 Operations after Using Copy or Mail Box Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3 Entering the Department ID and Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-4 Operations after Turning the Power ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-4 Operations after Using Copy Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-5 Entering Characters on the Touch Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6 Entering Alphabet Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6 Entering Special Letters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7 Setting in Inches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8
Chapter 11
Appendix
Specications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-2 Main Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-2 Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-5 Paper Deck-G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-5 Finisher-F1/ Saddle Finisher-F2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-6 Puncher Unit-B1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-8 Copy Tray-C3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-8 Card Reader-C1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-8 Relation of Original Orientation and Paper Orientation. . . . . . . . . . . . .11-9 Chart of Available Combination of Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-10 Copy Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-10 Mail Box Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-14 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15
14
Table of Contents
How to Use This Manual

The descriptions in this manual are presented using the following general format.
Making Copies of Facing Pages in a Book (Two-page Separation)

This feature enables you to copy facing pages in a book or magazine on separate sheets of paper. Original Copy
3
IMPORTANT
Place the original on the platen glass. You cannot place the original in the feeder and copy it in the Two-page Separation mode. In the Two-page Separation mode, combined use with the Saddle Stitch, Two-sided, Cover/Sheet Insertion, Booklet, Transparency Interleaving, Different Size Originals, Image Combination, Image Separation, and Image Repeat modes cannot be set. When copying facing pages with the two-sided mode, copy them with the Book 2-Sided mode. (See Making Two-sided Copies from Facing Pages in a Book (Book 2-Sided), on p. 2-45.)
4 5 9
Copying Facing Pages onto Two Separate Sheets
6 7 8
1 Place your original on the platen glass and

press the [Special Features] key.
(See Placing Originals, on p.1-11.)
NOTE
If you want to make copies in page order, begin copying from the first pages and work your way forward. Place the original face down so that the originals top edge is against the back edge of the platen glass.
ABC
2 Press the [Two-page Separation] key.
3-2
Making Copies of Facing Pages in a Book (Two-page Separation)
The above sample page does not actually exist in this manual.
1 Section Title 2 Chapter Title 3 Description of modes and examples of

output 4 IMPORTANT
Indicates operational warnings. Be certain to read these items so that you operate the machine correctly.
7 Reference
Page and chapter numbers containing related items are provided.
8 NOTE
Indicates notes for operation or additional explanations. Reading these is recommended.
9 Illustrations
Illustrations to help you identify keys and parts of the machine.
5 Subsection Title 6 Operation Instructions

Numbered steps describe how to set and operate various functions.
How to Use This Manual
15
Symbols Used in This Manual

Indicates a warning concerning operations that may lead to death or injury to persons if not performed correctly. In order to use the machine safely, always WARNING pay attention to these warnings. Indicates a caution concerning operations that may lead to injury to persons or damage to property if not performed correctly. In order to use the machine CAUTION safely, always pay attention to these cautions. Indicates operational warnings and restrictions. Be certain to read these items IMPORTANT to operate the machine correctly, and to avoid damage to the machine. Indicates notes for operation or additional explanations. Reading these is NOTE recommended.
The following symbols, key names and unit names are used in this manual.
Start
Key on control panel
key
Key on touch panel display
[OK] key
Unless otherwise mentioned, screenshots of the touch panel display and illustrations used in this manual are those taken when the Saddle Finisher-F2, and the Paper Deck-G1 are attached to the imageRUNNER 5000. Note that functions that cannot be used depending on the model or options are not displayed in the touch panel display.
The keys which are to be operated are marked with
as shown below in this manual.
When multiple keys which should be operated are displayed in a touch panel display, all keys are marked. Select the key which suit your needs.
16
Symbols Used in This Manual
Safety Considerations
Installation
WARNING
Do not install the machine near alcohol, paint thinner or other inammable substances. If inammable substances come into contact with electrical parts inside the machine, this may result in a re or electrical shock. Do not place the following items on the machine. If these items come into contact with a high-voltage area inside the machine, this may result in a re or electrical shock. - Necklaces and other metal objects - Cups, vases, owerpots and other containers lled with water or liquids If these items are dropped or spilled inside the machine, immediately turn OFF the main power switch and unplug the power plug from the outlet. Then, contact your service representative.
CAUTION
Do not install the machine in unstable locations such as on unsteady platforms or on inclined oors, or in locations which are subject to excessive vibrations, as this may cause the machine to fall or tip over, resulting in personal injury. Do not install the machine in such a way that the ventilation ports are blocked by objects. If the ventilation ports are blocked, heat will build up inside the machine and may result in a re.
Do not place heavy objects on the machine, as they may tip over or fall resulting in personal injury.
17
Do not install the machine in the following locations. - A damp or dusty location - A location which is exposed to direct sunlight - A location subject to high temperatures - A location that is subject to open ames
Do not remove the machines xing stoppers after the machine has been installed, as this may cause the machine to fall or tip over, resulting in personal injury.
Power Supply
WARNING
Do not damage or modify the power cord. Also, do not place heavy objects on the power cord, or pull on or excessively bend it, as this could cause electrical damage and result in a re or electrical shock.
Do not insert or unplug the power plug with wet hands, as this may result in electrical shock.
18
Do not plug the machine into a multi-plug power strip, as this may cause a re or electrical shock.
Do not bundle up or tie the power cord in a knot, as this may result in a re or electrical shock.
Insert the power cord completely into the outlet, as failure to do so may result in a re or electrical shock.
Do not use power cords other than the provided power cord, as this may result in a re or electrical shock. As a general rule, do not use extension cords. Using an extension cord may result in a re or electrical shock. If an extension cord must be used, however, untie the cord binding and insert the power plug completely into the extension cord outlet to ensure a rm connection between the power and extension cords.
19
If the breaker drops to the OFF position when you turn ON the power switch or when the copier is already ON, do not push the breaker back to the ON position. Doing so may lead to a re, electrical shock, smoke, or the tripping of other breakers in the facility. When this happens, unplug the power plug immediately and contact your service representative.
ON
CAUTION
Do not use power supplies with voltages other than 120 V AC, as this may result in a re or electrical shock. Always grasp the plug portion when unplugging the power plug. Pulling on the power cord may expose or snap the core wire, or otherwise damage the power cord. If the cord is damaged, this could cause an electricity leak and result in a re or electrical shock.
Leave sufcient space around the power plug so that it can be unplugged easily. If objects are placed around the power plug, you will be unable to unplug it in an emergency.
Handling
WARNING
Do not attempt to disassemble or modify the machine. There are high-temperature and highvoltage components inside the machine which may result in a re or electrical shock.
20
If the machine makes strange noises, or emits smoke, heat or unusual smells, immediately turn OFF the main power switch and unplug the power plug from the outlet. Then, contact your service representative. Continued use of the machine in this condition may result in a re or electrical shock.
Do not use highly ammable sprays near the machine. If gas from these sprays comes into contact with the electrical components inside the machine, this may result in a re or electrical shock.
When moving the machine, rst turn OFF the power switch, and then unplug the power plug. Failure to do so will damage the power cord which may cause a re or electrical shock. Do not drop paper clips, staples or other metal objects inside the machine. Also, do not spill water, liquids or ammable substances (alcohol, benzene, paint thinner, etc.) inside the machine. If these items come into contact with a high-voltage area inside the machine, this may result in a re or electrical shock. If these items are dropped or spilled inside the machine, immediately turn OFF the main power switch and unplug the power plug from the socket. Then, contact your service representative.
CAUTION
Close the Feeder gently to avoid catching your hand, as this may result in personal injury.
21
Do not touch the Finisher while the machine is printing, as this may result in personal injury. Turn OFF the power switch for safety when the machine will not be used for a long period of time such as overnight. Also, unplug the power plug for safety when the machine will not be used for an extended period of time such as during consecutive holidays. Do not place your hand in the part of the tray where stapling is performed while a Finisher is attached, as this may result in personal injury.
Maintenance and Inspections

WARNING
When cleaning the machine, rst turn OFF the main power switch and unplug the power plug. Failure to observe these steps may result in a re or electrical shock.
Clean the machine using a rmly wrung-out cloth dampened with a mild cleansing detergent. Do not use alcohol, benzene, paint thinner or other ammable substances. If ammable substances come into contact with a high-voltage area inside the machine, this may result in a re or electrical shock.
22
Do not throw used toner bottles into open ames, as this may ignite the toner remaining inside the bottles and result in burns or a re.
CAUTION
Unplug the power plug from the outlet at least once a year, and clean the area around the base of the plugs metal pins to ensure all dust is removed. If dust accumulates in this area, it may result in a re. There are some areas inside the machine which are subject to high voltages and high temperatures. Take adequate precautions when performing internal inspections to avoid burns or electrical shock. The simbol inside the machine indicates that the area is subject to high temperature, and not to be touched without care. When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do not allow necklaces, bracelets or other metal objects to touch the inside of the machine, as this may result in burns or electrical shock. When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, take care not to allow the toner on the jammed paper to come into contact with your hands or clothing, as this will dirty your hands or clothing. If they become dirty, wash them immediately with cold water. Washing with warm water will set the toner and make it impossible to remove the toner stains. When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, remove the jammed paper gently to prevent the toner on the paper from scattering and entering your eyes or mouth. If toner enters your eyes or mouth, wash immediately with cold water and consult a physician.
23
When loading paper or removing jammed originals or paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the original or paper. When removing used toner bottles from the toner supply port, remove the bottles carefully to prevent toner from scattering and entering your eyes or mouth. If toner enters your eyes or mouth, wash immediately with cold water and consult a physician.
Consumables
WARNING
Do not throw toner bottles into open ames, as this may cause the toner to ignite and result in burns or a re.
Do not store toner bottles or paper in places exposed to open ames, as this may cause the toner or paper to ignite and result in burns or a re. When discarding the toner bottles, put the bottles in a bag to prevent the toner from scattering, and dispose of it as a non-ammable.
CAUTION
Keep toner and other consumables out of the reach of small children. If these items are ingested, consult a physician immediately.
24
Warning Indications
CAUTION
The laser unit inside the machine emits laser light. Under no circumstances open the cover of the laser unit or remove the label attached to the cover. If the laser light escapes from the machine, exposure may cause serious damage to your eyes.
DANGER- Laser radiation when open.
AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM.
DANGER- Laser radiation when open

and interlock defeated.
25
Periodic Inspection of the Breaker

This machine has a breaker that detects excess current or leakage current. Be sure to test the breaker once or twice a month using the following procedure. IMPORTANT
Make sure that the main power is turned ON, and the machine is neither printing nor scanning before starting periodic inspection of the breaker. If a malfunction occurs after a periodic inspection, contact your service representative.
Press the test button located at the bottom left of this machine. NOTE
Push the test button with the tip of the ball-point pen, etc. For details of the location of the breaker when the Finisher is attached, see Internal View, on p. 1-3.
The breaker lever automatically goes to OFF ( side). Conrm that the power is cut OFF. IMPORTANT
Do not use the test button to turn the power ON and OFF. If the breaker lever does not go to OFF ( side), repeat step 1. If the breaker lever does not go to OFF ( side) despite carrying out the above procedure two or three times, contact your service representative.
Once you conrmed that the above operation takes place, press the main power switch to OFF ( side).
26
Move the breaker lever to ON ( I side).
Press the main power switch to ON ( I side)
Fill in the check sheet for the periodic inspection of the breaker at the end of this manual.
27
Installation Precautions
Avoid Installing the Machine in the Following Locations
Avoid locations which are subject to low temperatures and low humidity, or high temperatures and high humidity. For example, avoid installing the machine near water faucets, hot water heaters, humidiers, air conditioners, heaters and stoves.
Avoid installing the machine in the direct sunlight. If unavoidable, shade the machine using curtains.
Avoid poorly ventilated locations. During use, the machine generates ozone. However, the amount of ozone generated is not enough to affect the human body. Nevertheless, if the machine is used for a prolonged period of time in a poorly ventilated room, or when making a large quantity of prints, be sure to ventilate the room to make the working environment as comfortable as possible. Avoid locations where a considerable amount of dust accumulates.
28
Avoid locations where ammonia gas is emitted. Avoid locations near volatile ammables, such as alcohol or paint thinner. Avoid locations which are subject to vibrations. For example, avoid installing the machine on unstable oors or stands.
Avoid rapid changes in temperature. If the room in which the machine is installed is rapidly heated from a low temperature, condensation may form inside the machine. This can adversely affect print quality or result in an inability to obtain print images. Avoid installing the machine near computers or other precision electronic equipment. Electrical interference and vibrations generated by the machine during printing can adversely affect the operation of such equipment. Avoid installing the machine near televisions, radios or other similar electronic equipment. The machine might interfere with sound and picture signal reception, etc. Plug the machine into a dedicated power outlet and maintain as much space as possible between the machine and other electronic equipment. About the machines xing stoppers.
- Do not remove the machines xing stoppers after the machine has been installed. - If you put weight on the front of the machine while the paper drawers or units within the machine are pulled out all the way, the machine might fall forward. To prevent this from happening, make sure that the machines xing stoppers are set in place.
29
Select a Safe Power Supply

Plug the machine into a 120V AC outlet. Do not plug other electrical equipment into the outlet to which the machine is connected. Do not plug the machine into a multi-plug power strip. Doing so might cause a re. The power cable may become damaged if it is often stepped on or heavy objects are placed on it. Continued use of a damaged power cable can lead to an accident.
Provide Adequate Installation Space

Provide enough space on each side of the machine for unrestricted operation.
When the Paper Deck-G1, the Saddle Finisher-F2, When the Copy Tray-C3 is and the Puncher Unit-B1 are attached. attached. (Each option in extended condition)
more than 2-3/8" (60 mm) 29-1/4" (743 mm) more than 2-3/8" (60 mm) 29-1/4" (743 mm) 52-5/8" (1,335 mm)
49" (1,244 mm)
85-1/8" (2,162 mm)
Moving the Machine

If you intend to move the machine, contact your service representative beforehand.
30
49" (1,244 mm)
Handling Precautions
Do not attempt to disassemble or modify the machine. Some parts inside the machine are subject to high voltages and temperatures. Take adequate precaution when inspecting the inside of the machine. Do not carry out any inspections not described in this manual.
Be careful not to drop any foreign objects such as paper clips or staples inside the machine. If a foreign object comes into contact with electrical parts inside the machine, it might cause a short circuit and result in a re or an electrical shock. If there is unusual noise or smoke, immediately turn the main power switch OFF, then call your service representative. Using the machine in this state might cause a re or an electric shock. Also, avoid placing objects around the plug so that the machine can be unplugged whenever necessary. Do not turn the main power switch OFF or open the front door during the operation. This might result in paper jams. To avoid danger of ignition, do not use ammable aerosol products near the machine. If the machine will not be used for a prolonged period of time, for example during the night, turn the main power switch OFF. There may be an accident or a defect with the hard disk in the machine, causing loss, destruction or alternation of data received or stored on the hard disk. You are recommended not to store data on the hard disk without having copies or print-outs of such data outside.
CAUTION
CANON RECOMMENDS THAT DATA STORED ON THE PRODUCTS HARD DISK DRIVE BE DUPLICATED OR BACKED UP TO PREVENT ITS LOSS IN THE EVENT OF FAILURE OR OTHER MALFUNCTION OF THE HARD DISK DRIVE. NEITHER CANON NOR ANY SERVICE PROVIDER WILL BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF DATA STORED ON THE PRODUCTS HARD DISK DRIVE (SEE THE TERMS OF THE PRODUCTS LIMITED WARRANTY FOR MORE DETAILS).
Handling Precautions
31
Legal Limitations on Scanner Usage and the Use and Printing of Scanned Images
Using your Scanner to reproduce certain documents, and the printing and use of such reproductions, may be prohibited by law and may result in criminal and/or civil liability. A non-exhaustive list of these document is set forth below. This list is intended to be a guide only. If you are uncertain of the legality of using your Scanner to reproduce any particular document, and/or the printing and use of such reproductions, you should consult in advance with your legal advisor for guidance. Paper money Travelers Cheques Money Orders Food Stamps Certicates of Deposit Passports Postage Stamps (canceled or uncanceled) Immigration Papers Identifying badges or insignias Internal Revenue Stamps (canceled or uncanceled) Selective Service or draft papers Bonds or other certicates of indebtedness Checks or drafts drawn by Governmental agencies Stock Certicates Motor Vehicle Licenses and Certicates of Title Copyrighted Works/Works of Art without Permission of Copyright Owner
32
Legal Limitations on Scanner Usage and the Use and Printing of Scanned Images
What the imageRUNNER 5000 Series Can Do

Most operations for using this machine are done from the touch panel display. By pressing the keys following the messages in the touch panel display, you can utilize the functions of this machine.
Various Kinds of Copies

Basic Features Screen
The screen below, which appears when the machine is ready to make copies, is called the Basic Features screen.
Job/Print monitor area Displays the current status of the copy job or other functions.
Press to select the paper and the feeding position of the paper. (See Selecting the Copy Paper Size (Paper Select), on p. 2-9.)
Press to make copies at a different copy ratio. (See Changing the Copy Ratio (Copy Ratio), on p. 2-16.)
33
Press to select or cancel Collate, Group, or Staple collate modes. (See Collating Copies (Finisher), on p. 2-48.) When you select the [Collate] key.
REPORT
REPORT REPORT REPORT REPORT
Press to select or cancel the Two-sided mode. You can copy one-sided/ two-sided originals and facing pages of an original, such as books, on both the front and back sides of the paper, and make one-sided copies from twosided originals. (See Two-sided Copying (Twosided Mode), on p. 2-38.) When you select the [1 2-Sided] key.
1 2 3 4
1 1 1 1
Press the [Light] or [Dark] key to manually control the copy exposure. Press the [A] key to select or cancel Auto Exposure Control. (See Adjusting Exposure and Image Quality (Copy Exposure), on p. 2-32.)
Press to copy originals specifying the image quality (text only, text and photo, photo only). You can also select the type of photo (printed image/photo) when you set the photo mode in the Additional Functions beforehand. (See Selecting Image Quality, on p. 2-33.)
SCENE
SCENE
SCENE
The worlds coral reefs, where brilliantly colored fish and a myriad of other tropical creatures come together. Aptly nicknamed Tropical Forests under the sea, these spots of breathtaking beauty serve as home to countless varieties of life, and to us of the land, this alluring, dream-like world forms a tropical paradise filled with romance.
The worlds coral reefs, where brilliantly colored fish and a myriad of other tropical creatures come together.
Press to select the Special Features mode. (See Chapter 3 Useful Copy Functions.)
Press to check the printing status, change the printing sequence or cancel printing. (See Checking and Changing Printing Status, on p. 5-13.)
34
Special Features Screen

When you press the [Special Features] key in the Basic Features screen, the Special Features screen appears in the touch panel display. The Special Features screen displays special functions available for copying. In some functions, when a function is selected, a more detailed screen for the selected mode appears. To close the Special Features screen and return to the Basic Features screen, press the [Done] key. Pressing the ? key after selecting a function brings up a help screen with guidance information.
Guide
Special Features Screen 1/2
Press to select or cancel the Two-page Separation mode. This mode enables you to copy two pages of an opened book onto separate copy sheets. (See Making Copies of Facing Pages in a Book onto Two Separate Copy Sheets (Two-page Separation), on p. 3-2.)
Press to add covers. Also press to add insertion sheets or chapter pages between specified pages. (See Adding Front and Back Covers, Insertion Sheets and Chapter Pages to Copy Sets (Cover/Sheet Insertion), on p. 3-4.) When you select the [Front Cover] key.
REPORT REPORT
35
Press when making copies of several originals to form a booklet. (See Making Copies for Use as a Booklet (Booklet), on p. 3-9.)
Press to select or cancel the Transparency Interleaving mode. This mode enables you to insert a sheet between each transparency when copying transparencies. (See Making Copies with Sheets of Paper Interleaved between Transparencies (Transparency Interleaving), on p. 3-13.)
REPORT REPORT REPORT
1 2 3 4
2
Transparency
8
5
1
8 1
4
3
5 6 7 8
Interleaf sheet
Press to select or cancel the Shift mode. This mode enables you to shift the position of the original image on the copy sheet. (See Making Copies with Original Image Shifted (Shift), on p. 3-16.) When you select the [Center Shift Corner Shift] key.
Press to select or cancel the Margin mode. This mode enables you to create margins along the sides of copies. (See Making Copies with Margins (Margin), on p. 3-21.)
36
Press to select or cancel the Frame Erase mode. This mode enables you to eliminate dark border areas and lines that appear around original images, or shadows from punched holes. (See Erasing Shadows and Frame Lines from Copies (Frame Erase), on p. 3-24.) When you select the [Original Frame Erase] key.
Frame Erase selected
Press to select or cancel the Image Combination mode. This mode enables you to automatically reduce two, four or eight originals to fit on a one-sided or two-sided copy sheet. (See Reducing Two, Four or Eight Originals to Fit on a Single Copy Sheet (Image Combination), on p. 333.) When you select the [2 On 1] key.
Frame Erase not selected

1
1 2
Press to select or cancel the Image Separation mode. This mode enables you to divide an original into 2 or 4 sections and enlarge each section onto a copy sheet of specified size. (See Dividing an Original Into Equal Sections and Enlarging Each Section on a Separate Copy Sheet (Image Separation), on p. 3-38.) When you select the [1 to 2] key.
Press to make copies feeding different-size originals together in one group in the feeder. (See Feeding Different-size Originals Together in the Feeder (Different Size Originals), on p. 3-43.)
11"x17" original
CITY CITY
LTR original
CITY
1 2
Original feeding direction

1 2
37
Press to divide the originals into several parts and scan them, then subsequently print them all together. This is convenient when you cannot load all of the originals that you want to copy at one time. (See Copying SeparatelySet Originals (Job Build), on p. 3-45.)
Press to store or recall copy jobs. (See Storing/ Recalling Often Used Copy Settings in Memory (Mode Memory), on p. 3-48.)
Press to recall a previously set copy job. (See Recalling a Previous Copy Job (Recall), on p. 3-58.)
38
Special Features Screen 2/2
Press to make copies with the entire black/ white image inverted. (See Inverting Original Images (Nega/Posi), on p. 3-60.)
Press to copy an original with the image repeated in the vertical or horizontal direction. (See Making Copies with the Original Image Repeated (Image Repeat), on p. 3-62.)
CITY CITY CITY
SCENE
SCENE
Press to copy the image of the original reversed as reflection of the mirror. (See Making Copies with Image Reversed (Mirror Image), on p. 3-65.)
Press to select or cancel the Sharpness mode. This mode enables you to make copies of original images with the contrast reproduced more sharply. (See Making Sharp Contrast Copies (Sharpness), on p. 3-67.)
39
You can Store Data and Print it at Your Convenience

When you press the key, the Box selection screen appears. The Mail Box function enables you to store data scanned using this machine, or data sent from a personal computer as if storing documents in binders. The documents (data) stored in a box can be printed whenever necessary. Also, when you set the Merge Documents mode, you can print documents stored separately together as one document.
MAIL BOX
100 boxes
Scanning various originals
Sending data from computers Printing merged documents
By storing a password, you can print data without other people observing it.
You can print data whenever desired, with the settings necessary.
IMPORTANT
Each box can store up to 100 items of document or image data. You can store a total of up to 1,000 items of document or image data, or up to 3,700 pages (LTR-size Canon Standard Chart) of document or image data, in all boxes. Depending on the conditions under which the hard disk is used, it may not be possible to attain the above values in some cases.
NOTE
For details on how to use the Mail Box, see Chapter 4 Using the Mail Box Functions.
40
Box Selection Screen
You can store a name of a box or a password in the Mail Box Settings of the Additional Functions. (See Setting Specifications of the Mail Box Function (Mail Box Settings), on p. 6-46.)
Select a box Document Selection Screen
Originals scanned in the same way as a Copy function, or documents sent from a personal computer are stored in a box.
Select a document and
Printing Screen
Scanning Screen
Prints documents stored in a box. When you press the [Change P Settings] key, you can change the print settings. (See Printing Documents Stored in the Box, on p. 4-6.)
You can set various settings when scanning originals. (See Storing Originals in the Box, on p. 4-3.)
Start
key
41
You can Check, Change, and Cancel the Print Jobs

System Monitor Screen
By using the System Monitor screen, you can check the status of a printing document, cancel printing, or specify the printing priority.
NOTE
For a description of functions, see Chapter 5 Printing Efciently. The status of each icon displayed in the screen is as follows: : Copy job : Error : Printer job : Paper jam : Box job : Add toner
When you press the [Secured Print] key, you can print the document sent from a computer with a password. To print the document with a password, you need to enter that password. As these documents will not be printed unless the password is entered, you can print classified documents preventing other people from observing them. (See Printing Secured Documents, on p. 5-20.)
When you press the [Print Next] key, you can change the printing order of the selected document to be printed after the current print job is completed. (See Priority Printing, on p. 5-16.)
42
Setting the Specications According to the Method of Use

Additional Functions Screen
When you press the key, the Additional Functions screen appears in the touch panel display. With Additional Functions, you can set the specications common to all functions. By pressing the [Copy Settings] key, you can change the default settings of copy functions. For example, you can set Auto Orientation to On or Off, or set the Auto Collate to On or Off.
Additional Functions
NOTE
Settings made in the Additional Functions screen will not be changed even when you press the key. For details on how to set custom settings, see Chapter 6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your Needs. When the Network Multi-PDL Printer Kit is not attached, [Printer Settings], [Network Settings], [Remote UI] and [Clear Message Board] keys are not displayed. When the Network Multi-PDL Network Kit is not attached, [Report Settings], [Network Settings], [Remote UI] and [Clear Message Board] keys are not displayed. When the Network Scan function is not enabled, the [Auto Ofine] key is not displayed. For details of the following settings, refer to the instruction manual for the relevant function. - [Printer Settings] (See the PS/PCL Reference Guide.) - [Remote UI On/Off] (See the Remote UI Guide.) - [Network Settings] (See the Network Guide.)
Reset
43
Displaying a Guide Screen

Guide Function Screen
Pressing the ? key brings up a guide screen with information about the various features that are available with your machine.
Guide
Usage Guide
Pressing the ? key after selecting a function brings up a guide screen with an explanation for that function. Use this guide function if you do not understand how to use the mode you are setting. (In this example, the Margin mode has been selected.) If you press the ? key while setting [Margin], the touch panel display changes to the Guide Function Screen shown on the right. To return to the display for [Margin], press the [Done] key.
Guide Guide
Information Guide
This machine supports many functions. To find the right function for your particular needs or to find a simple description of a function, press the ? key while the Basic Features screen or Special Features screen is displayed. The Information Guide screen appears in the touch panel display as shown on the right.
Guide
Example: When copying photo originals: Press the [Various originals] key. You can display simple explanations of the various types of originals using the [] or [] key. Press the [Done] key to return to the Various originals menu screen. To return the display to the Guide Menu, press the [Guide Menu] key.
44
You can Read the Messages From the System Manager

A message board is used to display messages for the users of this machine. The messages are sent from the system manager using the utility software.
NOTE
The message board can be used when the network printer function is attached.
The following three types of message board are available: A message board without the [Done] key.
A message board with the [Done] key. NOTE

If you press the [Done] key and close the message board, you can perform normal operation. The message appears again when the main power is turned back ON, or after Auto Clear has taken place. You can set the Auto Clear Time from 0 to 9 minutes, in one-minute increments. You can also cancel this function. (See Setting the Time Taken for Display to Return to Basic Screen after Finishing Operations, on p. 6-27.)
A message board which the message appears in the Job/ Print monitor area.
NOTE
For details on how to erase the message board, see Erasing a Message Board, on p. 6-73.
45
Functions that Conserve Power Consumption

You can conserve power consumption efciently using the following functions when the machine is not operated. NOTE
There will be a slight delay when starting to use the machine next time. The touch panel display will turn OFF when the machine enters one of these functions. You can print data sent from a computer even when the machine enters one of these functions.
Energy Saver Mode

When the machine will not be used for a long time, you can press the key to put the machine in Energy Saver mode. This reduces the temperature of machines fixing unit and thereby conserves energy. To start opEnergy Saver erations again, press the key once more. Pressing the control panel power switch also reactivates the machine.
Energy Saver
NOTE
The following Energy Saver Mode settings can be selected: 10% mode, 25% mode, 50% mode, and None mode. (See Changing the Energy Saver Mode Setting, on p. 6-14.)
Low-Power Mode
If the machine is not operated (no keys are pressed) for a period of about 15 minutes after prints have been made or a key operation performed, the machine automatically enters the Low-Power mode. The Low-Power mode reduces energy consumption by lowering the fixation temperature. This function meets the ENERGY Energy Saver key once more. Pressing the STAR Program for energy efficiency. To start operations again, press the control panel power switch also reactivates the machine.
NOTE
The Low-Power Mode Time can be set from 10 minutes to 4 hours. (See Setting the Low-Power Mode Time, on p. 6-30.)
Sleep Mode
The Sleep mode reduces more power consumption than the Energy Saver mode and the Low-Power mode. You can set the machine to enter the Sleep mode whenever you desire by pressing the control panel power switch. However there will be a slight delay when starting to use the machine next time. To reactivate the machine, press the control panel power switch. The Basic Features screen will appear on the touch panel display.
NOTE
Turn the control panel power switch OFF when not using your machine for a prolonged period of time, for example at night. The Auto Sleep Time can be set from 10 minutes to 4 hours. (See Setting the Time to Initiate Auto Sleep after Finishing Operations, on p. 6-26.)
46
Quiet Mode
If this machine is not operated (no keys are pressed) for a certain period of time after prints have been made or the key operation performed, the device sounds from this machine are stopped, and the machine enters the Quiet mode.
NOTE
The Quiet Mode settings are in the range from 0 to 9 minutes in one-minute increments. (See Setting the Time Taken for the Unit to Quiet Down after Last Task, on p. 6-28.)
Daily Timer
At the time and day of the week set with the daily timer, the control panel power switch automatically turns OFF. To reactivate the machine, press the control panel power switch.
NOTE
The Daily Timer settings are in the range from Sunday to Saturday and from 00:00 to 23:59. (See Setting the Time That the Units Power Turns OFF on Different Days of the Week, on p. 6-29.)
Precedence relation of each function

- You can set the machine to enter the Energy Saver mode when the machine is neither in the Low-Power mode nor the Sleep mode. - If the machine is not operated for a period of about 15 minutes while the machine is in the Energy Saver mode, the machine automatically enters the Low-Power mode. - If the machine is not operated for a period of about 1 hour when the machine is in the Low-Power mode, or at the time and day of the week set with the Daily Timer, the machine automatically enters the Sleep mode. - If the time set for the Auto Sleep mode to take place is shorter than that of the Low-Power mode, the Auto Sleep mode has priority. (The machine enters the Sleep mode.) - Even when the machine is in the Low-Power mode, the Daily Timer will be performed at the time and day of the week set with the Daily Timer. (The machine enters the Sleep mode.) - Even before the time set with the Auto Sleep mode, the Daily Timer will be performed at the time and day of the week set with the Daily Timer. (The machine enters the Sleep mode.)
In the case of default settings : (Low-Power mode : 15 minutes, Auto Sleep mode : 1 hour, Daily Timer : no setting)
You can set the Energy Saver mode whenever desired by pressing Energy Saver the key during this period. Energy Saver mode
Low-Power mode
Low-Power mode
Auto Sleep mode Operation done 15 minutes
Sleep mode 1 hour Time
47
Other Useful Functions

Auto Drawer Switching Function
If a paper drawer runs out of paper during printing, the machine automatically locates another paper drawer loaded with the same size paper, and begins feeding paper from that paper drawer.
NOTE
You can set whether or not a paper drawer is subject to Auto Drawer Switching for each function. (See Setting a Paper Drawer for Auto Paper Selection/ Auto Drawer Switching, on p. 6-10.)
Auto Clear Function

If the machine is not operated for a period of about 2 minutes after prints have been made or a key operation performed, it automatically returns the Settings to the Standard mode.
NOTE
You can set the Auto Clear Time from 0 to 9 minutes, in one-minute increments. (See Setting the Time Taken for Display to Return to Basic Screen after Finishing Operations, on p. 6-27.)
Copy Waiting Time Display Function

When you turn On the Job Duration Display in the Additional Functions, the display shows the copy waiting time depending on the selected copy mode.
NOTE
The job duration time is not displayed for the Transparency Interleaving, Cover/Sheet Insertion, Different Size Originals, Rotate Collating and Rotate Grouping modes, or when the copy waiting time is less than one minute. (See Setting the Job Duration Display, on p. 6-39.)
48
Paper Supply Indicator Function

This function shows the remaining amount of paper in each paper drawer when selecting the paper source (see Selecting the Copy Paper Size (Paper Select), on p. 2-9, Selecting the Print Paper Size (Paper Select), on p. 4-61) or when paper in one paper drawer has run out during printing. There are four different indicators as shown below. Display Remaining paper Paper drawer is approximately 50% - 100% full. Paper drawer is approximately 10% - 50% full. Paper drawer is less than approximately 10% full. Paper drawer is empty.
Paper Supply indicator Display when selecting paper Display when paper has run out
Paper Output
When scanning and printing one original, and when printing on free-size paper or other available paper set in the stack bypass, the papers are output face up. In other cases, papers are output face down in page order. For details of other available papers, see Available Paper Stock, on p. 1-17.
49

This chapter describes what you should know before using this machine.
CH APTER
Parts and Their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 External View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Internal View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Control Panel Parts and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Main Power and Control Panel Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Turning the Power ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Control Panel Power Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Using the Touch Panel Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Frequently-used Keys on the Touch Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Touch Panel Key Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Adjusting the Brightness of the Touch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Placing Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orientation of Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing an Original on the Platen Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Originals in the Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 1-12 1-13 1-15
Available Paper Stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
1-1
Parts and Their Functions

External View
Control panel (See Control Panel Parts and Functions, on p. 1-4.)
Original supply tray
Feeder Original output area Stack bypass

Feeds transparencies and non-standard size paper stock.
(See Making Copies Using the Stack Bypass, on p. 2-12.)

Main power switch
Press to the I side to turn the power ON.
(See Main Power and Control Panel Power, on p. 1-6.)
Right cover
Open this cover when clearing a paper jam.
(See Removing Paper Jams, on p. 8-2.)

Paper drawer 3, 4
Each paper drawer holds up to 550 sheets of paper (20-lb bond (80 g/m2)). You can adjust the paper drawer 3 to hold the following standard paper sizes: 11"x17"/ LGL/ LTR/ LTRR/ STMTR.
Control panel Original supply tray Feeder Original output area Stack bypass Main power switch Right cover Paper drawer 3, 4 Paper drawer 1, 2
Paper drawer 1, 2
Each paper drawer holds up to 1,500 sheets of paper (20-lb bond (80 g/m2)).
1-2
Internal View
Rear side of platen glass cover Platen glass Toner supply cover
Front cover
Fixing Transport unit (Unit 1)
Duplexing Transport unit (Unit 2) Breaker (See Periodic Inspection of the Breaker, on p. 26.)
Rear side of platen glass cover Platen glass Toner supply cover Front cover Fixing Transport unit Duplexing Transport unit Breaker
Test button
1-3
Feeder
Feeder cover
Feeder cover Original supply tray Slide guide Original output area
Original supply tray
Original set indicator Lights when originals are placed on the original supply tray.
Slide guide
Original output area
IMPORTANT
If the paper delivery slot is blocked, printing may not be correctly performed. Therefore, do not place objects in the original output area.
Control Panel Parts and Functions

1: Counter Check key 2: Display contrast dial Touch panel display 3: COPY key 4: MAIL BOX key 5: SCAN key
Counter Check Display Contrast
COPY MAIL BOX SCAN
6: Numeric keys 7: Energy Saver key 8: Control panel power switch (sub power supply) 9: Stop key 10: Start key
Energy Saver
ON / OFF
Reset
1
Guide
?
2 5 8 0
3
Start
Stop
4 7
6 9
Clear
Additional Functions Interrupt
ID
Processing /Data
Error
Power
11: Clip holder
19: Clear key 20: Main Power indicator 18: Error indicator 17: Processing/Data indicator 16: ID key 15: Interrupt key 14: Additional Functions key 13: Guide key 12: Reset key
1-4
1: Counter Check key 2: Display contrast dial 3: COPY key 4: MAIL BOX key 5: SCAN key 6: Numeric keys 7: Energy Saver key 8: Control panel power switch (sub power supply) 9: Stop key 10: Start key 11: Clip holder 12: Reset key 13: Guide key 14: Additional Functions key 15: Interrupt key 16: ID key 17: Processing/Data indicator 18: Error indicator
The value of the charging counter is displayed in the touch panel. Use to adjust the brightness of the touch panel display. Press to use the Copy function. The Copy Basic Features screen appears in the touch panel display.
Press when the function is extended. Press to enter numerical values. Press to place the machine in the Energy Saver mode. Press to turn the control panel ON or OFF. When set to OFF, the machine is in the Sleep mode. Press to temporarily stop a scanning operation or an output operation of the copy function. Press to start an operation. Place paper clips here. Press to return the settings to the Standard mode. Press to display explanations of modes or functions in the touch panel display. Press to set additional functions. Press to interrupt a continuous copy job when you need to make priority copies. Press when setting the Department ID Management function. Flashes when this machine is performing operations. Flashes or lights when there is trouble in this machine. When the indicator flashes, follow the message which appears in the display. When it lights, contact your service repesentative. Press to clear incorrectly entered values or characters.
19: Clear key
20: Main Power indicator Lights when the main power is turned ON.
Counter Check key Display contrast dial COPY key MAIL BOX key SCAN key Numeric keys
1-5
Press to use the Mail Box function. The Box selection screen appears in the touch panel.
Main Power and Control Panel Power

The machine is provided with two power switches, a main power switch and a control panel power switch.
Turning the Power ON
Make sure that the power plug is rmly inserted into the power outlet, and press the power switch to ON ( I side). The main power switch is located on the right side of the machine. The main power indicator on the control panel lights when the main power switch is turned ON.
WARNING
Never remove or insert the power plug with wet hands. This can cause electrical shock.
IMPORTANT
If you turn OFF the main power, wait at least three seconds before turning the main power back ON. If the main power indicator on the control panel does not light even though the main power switch is ON, be sure to check the breaker to see if it is OFF. (See When the Power does not Turn ON, on p. 836.)
NOTE
When turning OFF the main power, press the main power switch to the side.
The screen on the right is displayed until the machine becomes ready to scan.
1-6
The screen on the right is displayed when the machine becomes ready to scan. NOTE
In this status, jobs can be reserved. (See Reserving a Job while the Machine is Warming Up, on p. 5-5.)
The machine becomes ready to print after about 5 minutes. (at a room temperature of 68F). Standard mode is set in the touch panel. IMPORTANT
If you scan originals while the machine is warming up, it will take longer than the time mentioned above for the machine to become ready to print.
The standard copy settings are as follows: - Copy ratio: Direct (100%) - Paper selection: Auto Paper Selection - Copy exposure: Auto Exposure Control - Copy quantity: 1 - Copy function: 11-sided copy You can change the standard copy settings. (See Changing the Current Standard Settings, on p. 6-42.) You can choose which functions to display in the Basic Features screen according to the Additional Functions settings. (See Selecting the Initial Function at Power ON, on p. 6-6.)
If the message You must insert a control card. appears, insert a control card. (See Operations before Using Copy or Mail Box Functions, on p. 10-3.)
1-7
NOTE
If the message Enter the Department ID and Password using the numeric keys. appears, enter the Department ID and Password. (See Operations after Turning the Power ON, on p. 10-4.)
Control Panel Power Switch

Press the control panel power switch to cancel the Sleep mode and resume normal machine operations. NOTE
The machine can receive documents from a personal computer, and print them out even in the Sleep mode.
1
1-8
Using the Touch Panel Display

Frequently-used Keys on the Touch Panel Display
The following keys on the touch panel display are used frequently. Before You Start Using This Machine
Cancel Key Next Key Back Key Done Key OK key Special Features Key
key
Press to close the current setting screen, retaining the programmed settings in the Additional Functions screen. Press to cancel the function (mode) that is either being set or has already been set in screens other than the Additional Functions screen. Press to set the function (mode) and proceed to the next setting procedure. Press to go back to the previous procedure, saving the setting already set, when setting a function (mode). Press to close the present screen. Press to decide the setting of a function (mode). The [ ] mark in some keys indicates that those keys have another screen to set their functions.
key key
key key key
1-9
Touch Panel Key Display

When you press a key displayed on the screen, the key is highlighted and the corresponding function (mode) is set. Some keys may not be highlighted even when that function (mode) is set.
CAUTION
Press the touch panel keys gently with a nger. Do not press the touch panel with a pencil, ballpoint pen, or other sharp objects. Such sharp objects can scratch the surface of the touch panel or break it.
NOTE
Before using the touch panel, peel off the protective lm from the display.
When you set a certain function (mode), the characters on some keys may become difcult to see. You cannot press these keys displayed in this way, which means that you cannot set these functions in combination with the presently set function (mode). Presently set function Functions that cannot be set in combination with the presently set function Functions that can be set in combination with the presently set function
Adjusting the Brightness of the Touch Panel

If the touch panel display is hard to view, use the display contrast dial on the control panel to adjust the brightness.
To make the touch panel brighter, turn the dial counter-clockwise. To make it darker, turn the dial clockwise.
1-10
Placing Originals
Set the originals in one of the following places, depending on the size and type that you want to print and the settings that you have programed. Platen glass Place the originals on the platen glass when scanning bound originals, originals on heavy paper, lightweight paper, and transparencies. Feeder Place a stack of originals in the feeder, then press the key, and the machine automatically scans them into memory. Two-sided originals can also be automatically turned over and scanned as two-sided image data.
Start
NOTE
If the original has too many pages to be placed in the feeder all at once, set the Job Build mode. (See Copying Separately-Set Originals (Job Build), on p. 3-45, and Scanning Originals Separately Set as One Document (Job Build), on p. 4-45.)
Placing Originals
1-11
Orientation of Originals
You can place originals vertically or horizontally. Always align the top edge of your original with the back edge of the platen glass or the feeder. NOTE
If the top edge of the original is not aligned with the back edge of the platen glass, prints may not be made correctly depending on the mode you have set. LTR/ STMT-size originals can be placed vertically or horizontally. However, the scanning speed for horizontally placed originals is somewhat slower than that for vertically placed originals. You can place originals horizontally when printing with Preset Zoom mode, such as LTR11"x17". (Horizontally placed LTR/ STMT-size originals are referred to as LTRR/ STMTR.) 11"x17"/ LGL-size originals must be placed horizontally.
[Platen glass]
Place the original face down.
Place the original face down.
Vertical placement
Horizontal placement
[Feeder]
ABC
ABC
Vertical placement
Horizontal placement
1-12
Placing Originals
Placing an Original on the Platen Glass

You should use the platen glass when scanning books, originals on heavy or lightweight paper, transparencies etc., into memory.
Lift up the feeder. Before You Start Using This Machine Placing Originals 1-13 IMPORTANT
Lift up the feeder about 11-7/8" (30 cm), so that the S-shaped sensor detaches from the feeder. Otherwise, the size of originals may not be detected correctly.
Return the original supply tray to its original position if the original supply tray is pulled up.
Place your original. The surface that you want to scan into memory must be placed face down. Align the corner of the original with the top left corner of the platen glass. NOTE
Place books and other bound originals on the platen glass in the same way. When enlarging LTR/ STMT-size originals to 11"x17"/ LGL-size paper, place the original horizontally on the platen glass and align it with the LTRR or STMTR marks. When copying STMT-size original using the platen glass, you need to set the LTRR/STMT Original Selection in the Additional Functions. (See Distinguishing LTRR-Size and STMT-Size Originals, on p. 6-16.)
Gently lower the feeder.
CAUTION
Close the feeder gently to avoid catching your hand, as this may result in personal injury. Do not press down the feeder hard when using the platen glass to scan thick books. This may damage the platen glass and cause personal injury.
NOTE
When placing originals on the platen glass, the size of the original is detected after the feeder has been lowered. Be sure to lower the feeder before copying. Postcards cannot be detected. Follow the instructions on the display which appears after pressing the key and specify the original size, or select the paper manually.
Start
Remove the original from the platen glass when scanning is completed.
1-14
Placing Originals
Placing Originals in the Feeder

Place a stack of originals in the feeder, then press the key, and the machine automatically scans them into memory. Two-sided originals can also be automatically scanned as two-sided image data. You can place the following originals in the original supply tray: Weight : 13 to 32-lb bond (50 to 128 g/m2) Size : 11"x17"/ LGL/ LTR/ LTRR/ STMT Tray capacity : 100 sheets (20-lb bond (80 g/m2)) IMPORTANT
Do not place the following types of originals in the feeder: - Originals with tears or large binding holes - Severely curled originals or originals with sharp folds - Clipped or stapled originals - Carbon-backed paper or other originals which might not feed smoothly - Transparencies and other highly transparent originals Check the condition of originals which have been fed through the feeder 30 times. Originals which have been fed through the feeder 30 times can become folded or wrinkled and might not be fed smoothly. If the feeder rollers are soiled from scanning an original written with pencil, perform the Feeder Cleaning. (See Original Scanned Using the Feeder Becomes Dirty (Feeder Cleaning), on p. 8-30.)
Start
NOTE
Place the original as far as it will go until the original set indicator is lit.
Adjust the slide guides to t the size of the originals.
Placing Originals
1-15
Neatly place your originals face up in the original supply tray. IMPORTANT
Do not add or remove originals while the originals are being scanned.
NOTE
When enlarging LTR/ STMT-size originals to 11"x17"/ LGL-size paper, place your originals horizontally. You can place different-size originals (i.e. LTR and 11"x17", STMT and LTRR) together in one group in the feeder when you set the Different Size Originals mode. (See Feeding Different-size Originals Together in the Feeder (Different Size Originals), on p. 3-43.) The scanned originals are output face down to the original output area.
When scanning is completed, remove the original sequentially from the original output area to avoid paper jams.
Original output area
1-16
Placing Originals
Available Paper Stock

Paper types available for this machine are as follows: When you store the paper type loaded in the paper drawers of this machine, the type of paper which can be set is indicated by the icons. (See Identifying the Type of Paper in a Paper Drawer, on p. 6-12.)
Available Loading Place (Paper Set Place) Paper Type Plain *
1 2 1
Paper drawer 1, 2 Paper drawer 3, 4 Stack bypass
Paper Deck
Heavy * Color *
1
Recycled *
Letterhead *
*4
Tracing Paper Transparency Labels 3-Hole Punch* Bond *

1 1
*4 *5
IMPORTANT
*1 Plain, Recycled, Color, Bond, and 3-Hole Punch papers are from 17-lb to 24-lb bond (64 g/m 2 to 90 g/m2). *2 Heavy paper is from 25-lb bond to 110-lb index (91 g/m2 to 200 g/m2). *3 Pre-printed papers with logos or patterns. *4 When copying on Letterhead or 3-Hole Punch papers, we recommend that you set the Image Orientation Priority to On in the Additional Functions. (See Setting Image Orientation Priority to On/ Off, on p. 6-38.) *5 The 3-Hole Punch papers can only be set vertically (LTR). Set the papers with the holes on the left side when loading in the paper drawers. When loading in the stack bypass or the paper deck, set the papers with the holes on the right side.
1-17
Available Loading Place (Paper Set Place) Paper Size Length x Width Paper drawer 1, 2 Paper drawer 3, 4 Stack bypass 11"x17" LGL LTR LTRR STMTR Free Size 11" x 17" 8-1/2" x 14" 11" x 8-1/2" 8-1/2" x 11" 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" (4" x 5-7/8" to 11-5/8" x 17") Paper Deck
NOTE
For details on how to load paper, see the following pages: - Paper drawer 1 to 4: Loading Paper (See p. 7-2.) - Paper Deck: Loading Paper in the Paper Deck (See p. 9-4.) - Stack bypass: Making Copies Using the Stack Bypass (See p. 2-12.)
1
1-18
Basic Copying
This chapter describes the basic copy functions.
CH APTER
Flow of Copy Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Canceling a Copy Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Canceling from the Touch Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Canceling with the key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Stop
Making Copies Using the Stack Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Changing the Copy Ratio (Copy Ratio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Enlarging/ Reducing Originals to a Standard Size (Preset Zoom) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Specifying the Copy Ratio by % (Zoom Designation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Automatically Setting the Copy Ratio Based on the Original and Copy Paper Sizes (Auto) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Slightly Reducing Images to Prevent the Original Periphery from Being Cut (Entire Image) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 Calculating the Copy Ratio Based on the Original and Copy Paper Sizes (Zoom Program) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 Enlarging/Reducing Originals with Copy Ratios Set Independently for X and Y Axes (XY Zoom) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28 Adjusting Exposure and Image Quality (Copy Exposure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjusting Copy Exposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting Image Quality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Adjustment of Exposure and Image Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32 2-32 2-33 2-35
Entering the Copy Quantity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36 Specifying the Required Number of Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36 Changing the Copy Quantity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37 Two-sided Copying (Two-sided Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Making Two-sided Copies from One-sided Originals (1 2-Sided) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Making Two-sided Copies from Two-sided Originals (2 2-Sided) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Making One-sided Copies from Two-sided Originals (2 1-Sided) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Making Two-sided Copies from Facing Pages in a Book (Book 2-Sided) . . . . . . . . 2-38 2-38 2-40 2-43 2-45
2-1
Selecting the Copy Paper Size (Paper Select). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Automatic Paper Selection (Auto) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Manual Paper Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Basic Copying
2. Basic Copying
Collating Copies (Finisher) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48 Checking a Sample Set Before Copying (Sample Set). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-54 Checking the Copy Mode Settings (Setting Conrmation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-56 Changing or Canceling a Selected Copy Mode (Setting Conrmation/Cancel) . . . . . . .2-57 Basic Copying
2
2-2
Flow of Copy Operations

This section describes the ow of basic copy operations. NOTE
For details on the following items, see the indicated pages. - Main Power and Control Panel Power (See p. 1-6.) - Loading Paper and Adding Toner (See Chapter 7.) - Routine Cleaning (See p. 8-25.)
Press the
COPY
key.
y Contrast COPY MAIL BOX SC
NOTE
If the message You must insert a control card. appears, insert a Control Card. (See Operations before Using Copy or Mail Box Functions, on p. 10-3.)
If the message Enter the Department ID and Password using the numeric keys. appears, enter the Department ID and Password. (See Operations after Turning the Power ON, on p. 10-4.)
2-3
Basic Copying
Place your originals. (See Placing Originals, on p. 1-11.) NOTE

When Auto Collate is set to On, the Collate mode or the Offset Collate mode is automatically set at the point when you place the originals in the feeder. (See Setting Automatic Collate On/ Off, on p. 6-37.)
Basic Copying
Set the copy mode in the Basic Features screen. (See Chapter 2 Basic Copying.) NOTE
In the Basic Features screen, you can select the copy paper size, set exposure, image quality, copy ratio, and two-sided mode, and select the desired collating function.
Set the copy mode in the Special Features screen. You can continue setting other available modes. (See Chapter 3 Useful Copy Functions.) NOTE
The Special Features screen is divided into two screens. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to select the desired mode.
Enter the copy quantity. (See Entering the Copy Quantity, on p. 2-36.)
Reset
1
Guide
2 5 8 0
3
Start
?
4 7
6 9
Clear
Interrupt
ID
2-4
Press the
Start
key.
3
Start Stop
If there is a current job, the machine scans the original, then waits to print it. Printing starts when the current job is completed. IMPORTANT
You cannot change copy settings such as the copy quantity, copy paper size and copy ratio during copying.
6 9
Clear
When scanning is completed, remove the original.
When the screen on the right appears: Press the key once for each original. When scanning is completed, press the [Done] key.
Start
When you want to copy a different original while copying: You can set the next job while copying. (See Reserving a Copy Operation during Printing (Reserve Copy), on p. 5-7.)
When you want to stop copy job before it is completed, press the key. (See Canceling a Copy Job, on p. 2-7.)
Stop
ON / OFF
NOTE
After you have pressed the key, several copies may be output from the machine. You can stop copy job in the System Monitor screen. (See Checking and Changing Printing Status, on p. 5-13.)
ar
Stop
Stop Start
2-5
Basic Copying
NOTE
When you want to interrupt a copy job: To interrupt a copy job when you need to make priority copies, press the key. (See Interrupting the Current Job to Make Priority Copies (Interrupt Mode), on p. 5-3.)
Interrupt
1
Guide
2 5 8 0
3 6 9
Clea
?
4 7
Interrupt
ID
Processing /Data
Error
Basic Copying
When the copy has been made, remove it from the tray. NOTE
If the optional Control Card is attached, remove the Control Card. (See Operations after Using Copy or Mail Box Functions, on p. 10-3.)
If you have set Department ID Management, press the ID key. (See Operations after Using Copy Functions, on p. 10-5.)
1
Guide
2 5 8 0
3 6 9
Clear
?
4 7
Interrupt
ID
Processing /Data
Error
2-6
Canceling a Copy Job

NOTE
You can also cancel the copy job in the System Monitor screen. (See Checking and Changing Printing Status, on p. 5-13.)
Canceling from the Touch Panel Display
Press the [Cancel] key on the right screen which appears while the machine is waiting to print the document. The machine stops copying. NOTE
When you canceled a job during scanning, remove the original of that job.
Canceling with the
Stop
Key
ON / OFF
Press the NOTE
Stop
key.
When canceling a job which is being printed, press the [Cancel] key on the touch panel which appears during printing.
3
Start
Stop
6 9
Clear
Select the job you want to cancel from the list, and press the [Cancel] key. The selected job is canceled. NOTE
To continue the job, press the [Resume Copy] key. You cannot cancel multiple jobs. When canceling multiple jobs, select and cancel the jobs in turn.
2-7
Basic Copying
Press the [Resume Copy] key.
2
2-8
Basic Copying
Selecting the Copy Paper Size (Paper Select)

NOTE
When copying an original onto the same paper size at a 100% copy ratio, the periphery of the original may be cut slightly on the copy. For details of the size of the non-image areas, see Non-image areas in the Specications, on p. 11-3. If you set the Entire Image mode, the copied image is automatically reduced slightly based on the copy paper size and copy image size. As a result, the entire original image is reproduced on the copy paper without its periphery being cut off. (See Slightly Reducing Images to Prevent the Original Periphery from Being Cut (Entire Image), on p. 2-22.)
Automatic Paper Selection (Auto)

NOTE
Auto is the Standard mode setting.
Place your originals and press the [Paper Select] key.

Auto Paper Selection Paper Select
Select the [Auto] key, and press the [Done] key.
2-9
Basic Copying
The screen on the right appears.
Basic Copying
Proceed to make copies in the usual way. IMPORTANT

In the Automatic Paper Selection mode, combined use with the Auto Copy Ratio, XY Auto Copy Ratio, Rotate Collating, Rotate Grouping, Saddle Stitch, Booklet, Image Combination, Image Separation, and Image Repeat (Auto) modes cannot be set. You cannot select the Automatic Paper Selection mode when you set the Different Size Originals mode in combination with the Shift mode or the Cover/Sheet Insertion mode. You cannot use Automatic Paper Selection when copying the following types of originals. Copy these using Manual Paper Selection. - Non-standard size originals - Highly transparent originals such as transparencies - Originals with an extremely dark background - Originals smaller than STMT in size
Manual Paper Selection

You can make copies after selecting the paper size and type (colored paper, recycled paper, etc.) loaded in the paper drawer.
Place your originals and press the [Paper Select] key. NOTE
2-10
Select the desired paper size, and press the [Done] key. NOTE
The paper icon in the display indicates that the paper is loaded vertically, and the icon indicates that the paper is loaded horizontally in the paper drawers. Paper sizes with the sufx R (such as LTRR) indicate paper placed in the paper drawer or the stack bypass horizontally. The paper sizes are displayed in the order in which they are loaded in the paper drawers. The paper sizes which are loaded in the paper drawers are shown in the display. The type of paper (color, recycled) loaded in the paper drawers can be indicated by the icons. (See Identifying the Type of Paper in a Paper Drawer, on p. 6-12.)
The display returns to the Basic Features screen, and the selected paper size is displayed.
Proceed to make copies in the usual way. NOTE

You can cancel the mode by pressing the
Reset
key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.)
2-11
Basic Copying
Making Copies Using the Stack Bypass

When making copies on transparencies or non-standard size paper stock, place the paper stock in the stack bypass. The following two kinds of paper can be copied using the stack bypass. Standard Size You can place standard inch paper, and A or B series paper. Free Size You can place non-standard size (4"x5-7/8" to 11"-5/8"x17" (100 mm x 148 mm to 297 mm x 432 mm)) paper. Basic Copying IMPORTANT
Note the following points when using the stack bypass. - Copy quantity: 1 to about 50 sheets (stack about 3/16" (5 mm) high) - Paper size: 4"x5-7/8" to 11"-5/8"x17" (100 mm x 148 mm to 297 mm x 432 mm) - Paper weight: 17-lb bond to 110-lb index (64 g/m2 to 200 g/m2) - Curl down paper before use. (Curling amount: less than 3/8" (10 mm.)) There are some types of paper stock which may meet the above specications but cannot be fed in the stack bypass. Place STMT-size paper horizontally in the stack bypass. Do not set different size paper at the same time. When you set free-size paper, combined use with the Auto Copy Ratio, Entire Image, Staple, Hole Punch, 1 2-Sided, 2 2-Sided, Book 2-Sided, Two-page Separation, Cover/Sheet Insertion, Shift, Booklet, Transparency Interleaving, Image Combination, Image Separation, and Image Repeat modes cannot be set.
NOTE
When copying the following originals, you cannot use Automatic Paper Selection. Use Manual Paper Selection with these types of paper. - Highly transparent originals such as transparencies - Originals with an extremely dark background
Open the stack bypass. NOTE

If the paper you want to specify is already in the stack bypass, press the [Paper Select] key, then specify the desired paper. If the paper size loaded in the stack bypass is different from the paper size stored in the Standard Stack Bypass Settings, press the [StackBypass Setting] key and change the setting to the loaded paper size. (See Setting the Standard Paper for the Stack bypass, on p. 6-19.) If the paper loaded in the stack bypass is not the paper which you want to specify, check whether or not there is a current job or a reserved job. (See
Checking and Changing Printing Status, on p. 5-13.)

- If there is a current/ reserved job, reserve a change for the stack bypass. (See Using the Stack Bypass while Reserving Print Jobs, on p. 5-10.)
2-12
Adjust the slide guides to the size of the paper.
Slide Guide When feeding large-size paper, pull out the auxiliary tray.
Auxiliary tray
Place the paper in the stack bypass. Align the required number of sheets of paper with the slide guides. The surface that you want to copy on (opened surface) must be placed face up. Insert the paper into the machine until it stops. The screen of step 4 appears in the display. IMPORTANT
Make sure that the height of the paper stack does not exceed the limit mark.
2-13
Basic Copying
Select the paper size, and press the [Next] key. IMPORTANT
Set the paper size to the same size as the paper placed on the stack bypass. When placing paper other than a standard size, press the [Free Size] key.
NOTE
To select A or B series paper size, press the [A/Bsize] key.
Basic Copying
If the screen on the right is displayed, adjust the width of the slide guides to match the paper size.
Select the type of paper (Plain, Heavy, etc.), and press the [OK] key. IMPORTANT
Select the correct paper type to avoid a paper jam.
NOTE
For details of paper types, see Available Paper Stock, on p. 1-17.
2-14
Press the [Done] key. NOTE

When you press the [StackBypass Setting] key, you can set the paper size again. (See Using the Stack Bypass while Reserving Print Jobs, on p. 5-10.
Paper size loaded presently Paper size selected
Place your originals and program the copy settings. NOTE

When there is no reserved job, continue the procedure from step 2.

Reset
2-15
Basic Copying
Changing the Copy Ratio (Copy Ratio)

Enlarging/ Reducing Originals to a Standard Size (Preset Zoom)
You can enlarge or reduce standard size originals to standard paper size. [Reduce] LGL LTR (78 %) 11"x17" LGL, 11"x15" LTR (73 %) 11"x17" LTR (64 %) 11"x17" STMT (50 %) Minimum ratio (25%) IMPORTANT
Place your originals horizontally in following cases: - When enlarging LTR-size originals to 11"x17"/ LGL-size paper. - When enlarging STMT-size originals to11"x17"-size paper. When reducing 11"x17"/ LGL-size originals to LTR-size with Image Orientation Priority set to Off, select LTRR-size paper.
Basic Copying
[Enlarge] Maximum ratio* (400%) STMT 11"x17" (200 %) LTR 11"x17" (129 %) LGL 11"x17" (121 %) *Only on the platen glass
NOTE
Placing an original horizontally means setting with the longer side of the original sideways.
Place your originals and press the [Paper Select] key. NOTE
Copy Ratio Preset Zoom
Select the [Auto] key, and press the [Done] key.
2-16
Press the [Copy Ratio] key.
To reduce, select a reduction ratio. To enlarge, select an enlargement ratio.
Press the [Done] key.
The display returns to the Basic Features screen, and the selected copy ratio is displayed.
2-17
Basic Copying

To return the copy ratio to 100%, press the [Direct] key. You can cancel the mode by pressing the key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.)
Reset
Specifying the Copy Ratio by % (Zoom Designation)

Basic Copying You can reduce or enlarge images by any copy ratio, in 1% increments. The available copy ratios are from 25% to 400% when the original is placed on the platen glass, and from 25% to 200% when the original is placed in the feeder. Original Copy
CITY
CITY
Zoom Designation
CITY
CITY
Place your originals and press the [Copy Ratio] key.
Enter the copy ratio with the [] or [+] key or the Numeric keys ( 0 - 9 ) in 1% increments. NOTE
Even if you entered the ratio with the Numeric keys ( 0 - 9 ), you can change the entered values with the [] and [+] keys. If you make a mistake when entering values, press the C key, and enter the correct value.
Clear
2-18

If you enter a value outside the setting range, a message prompting you to enter the appropriate value will appear on the screen.

To return the copy ratio to 100%, press the [Direct] key. You can cancel the mode by pressing the key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.)
Reset
2-19
Basic Copying
Automatically Setting the Copy Ratio Based on the Original and Copy Paper Sizes (Auto)
The machine automatically selects the appropriate copy ratio based on the size of the originals and the selected paper. The available copy ratios are from 25% to 400% when the original is placed on the platen glass, and from 25% to 200% when the original is placed in the feeder. Original Basic Copying Copy
Auto
IMPORTANT
You cannot use the Auto mode with Automatic Paper Selection. You cannot copy highly transparent originals, such as transparencies, in the Auto mode. Use the Preset Zoom or Zoom Designation modes. To use the Auto mode, your originals must conform to a standard paper size.
NOTE
If an error occurs between the Auto copy ratio and the actual copy size, you can adjust this with the Zoom Fine Adjustment function. (See Fine-adjusting Zoom When Differences in Original Image and Print Image Occur, on p. 6-31.) The paper sizes that can be used with Auto are 11"x17"/ LGL/ LTR/ LTRR/ STMT/ STMTR. However, when copying STMT-size original using the platen glass, you need to set the LTRR/STMT Original Selection in the Additional Functions. (See Distinguishing LTRR-Size and STMT-Size Originals, on p. 6-16.)
Place your originals and press the [Paper Select] key.
2-20
Select the paper size, and press the [Done] key. NOTE
Select a paper size other than Auto. When you select the [Auto] key, the paper loaded in the paper drawer 1 will be selected.
Press the [Auto] key, and press the [Done] key.

To return the copy ratio to 100%, press the [Direct] key. To cancel the setting, press the [Copy Ratio] and [Auto] keys in that order. You can also cancel the mode by pressing the key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.) If the original was placed on the platen glass, the zoom ratio appears when the feeder is lowered, provided that the original size can be detected. If the original was placed in the feeder, the zoom ratio appears when the key is pressed. The zoom ratio can be set within the range of 25% to 400%.
Reset Start
2-21
Basic Copying
Slightly Reducing Images to Prevent the Original Periphery from Being Cut (Entire Image)
When copying an original onto the same size of paper at a 100% copy ratio, the periphery of the original may be cut slightly on the copy. However, if you set the Entire Image mode, the copied image is automatically reduced slightly based on the copy paper size and copy image size. As a result, the entire image is reproduced on the copy without its periphery being cut off. IMPORTANT Basic Copying
In the Entire Image mode, combined use with the Booklet, Frame Erase, Image Combination, Image Separation, Image Repeat, and Mirror Image modes cannot be set.
Entire Image
Press the [Entire Image] key, and press the [Done] key.

To cancel the setting, press the [Copy Ratio] and [Entire Image] keys in that order. You can also cancel the mode by pressing the key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.)
Reset
2-22
Calculating the Copy Ratio Based on the Original and Copy Paper Sizes (Zoom Program)
You can change the copy ratio by specifying the original size and paper size in inches. The following two Zoom Program modes are available. The available copy ratios are from 25% to 400% when the original is placed on the platen glass, and from 25% to 200% when the original is placed in the feeder. Making copies with the same XY copy ratio (Zoom) Designate the same copy ratio for the vertical and horizontal directions. Basic Copying
Y=5-1/2" (140 mm)
Original
Copy
Zoom Program
X=4" (100 mm)
X=5-7/8" (150 mm)
Making copies with different XY copy ratios (XY Zoom) Designate different copy ratios for the vertical and horizontal directions. Original Copy
Y=4-3/4" (120 mm)
X=4" (100 mm)
X=3-1/8" (80 mm)
NOTE
The designated sizes are converted to the copy ratio (%) as follows: - copy ratio (%) = (copy size original size) x 100
2-23
Making Copies with the Same XY Copy Ratio (Zoom)
Zoom
Basic Copying
Press the [Other Zoom] key.
Press the [Zoom Program] key.
2-24
Press the [Original Size] key and enter the original size, then press the [Copy Size] key and enter the copy size. Then press the [OK] key. NOTE
When entering values in millimeters, you can use the Numeric keys ( 0 - 9 ) and the C key on the control panel. If you make a mistake when entering values, press the [C] key on the touch panel, and enter the values again. If you want to enter values in millimeters, press the [mm] key. For details on how to enter the values in inches, see Setting in Inches, on p. 10-8. To designate the sizes of the horizontal direction (X) and the vertical direction (Y) independently, press the [XY Zoom] key. If the zoom ratio is less than 25%, a message telling you that the ratio will be adjusted to 25% will appear. If it is more than 400%, a message telling you that the ratio will be adjusted to 400% will appear.
Clear

Place the original on the platen glass if the zoom ratio is more than 200%. To return the copy ratio to 100%, press the [Direct] key. To cancel the setting, press the [Copy Ratio], [Other Zoom], [Zoom Program], and [Cancel] keys in that order. You can also cancel the mode by pressing the key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.)
Reset
Making Copies with Different XY Copy Ratios (XY Zoom)

XY Zoom
2-25
Basic Copying
Basic Copying
Press the [XY Zoom] key.
2-26
Press the [X] (horizontal direction) key and the [Y] (vertical direction) keys for both the original size and the copy size, and enter each value for X and Y. NOTE
When entering values in millimeters, you can use the Numeric keys ( 0 - 9 ) and the C key on the control panel. If you make a mistake when entering values, press the [C] key on the touch panel, and enter the correct values. If you want to enter values in millimeters, press the [mm] key. For details on how to enter the values in inches, see Setting in Inches, on p. 10-8. To set the same values for the X and Y axes, press the [Zoom] key. If the zoom ratio is less than 25%, a message telling you that the ratio will be adjusted to 25% will appear. If it is more than 400%, a message telling you that the ratio will be adjusted to 400% will appear.
Clear
Enter all the values, and press the [OK] key.

Place the original on the platen glass if the zoom ratio is more than 200%. To return the copy ratio to 100%, press the [Direct] key. To cancel the setting, press the [Copy Ratio], [Other Zoom], [Zoom Program], and [Cancel] keys in that order. You can also cancel the mode by pressing the key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.)
Reset
2-27
Basic Copying
Enlarging/Reducing Originals with Copy Ratios Set Independently for X and Y Axes (XY Zoom)
If you set the XY Zoom mode, you can make enlarged or reduced copies with different XY copy ratios. The following two XY Zoom modes are available. The available copy ratios are from 25% to 400% when the original is placed on the platen glass, and from 25% to 200% when the original is placed in the feeder. Manually specifying the copy ratio (XY Zoom) You can manually specify the XY copy ratios in 1% increments. Basic Copying Original Copy
Enlarging and reducing with different XY copy ratios

Y=80%
X=120%
NOTE
If you set the copy ratio with the XY Zoom mode, the copy image computed from the original size, copy ratio etc., is automatically rotated and copied to match the paper.
2-28
Automatically specifying the copy ratio (Auto XY Zoom) The XY copy ratio is automatically set to suit the size of the selected paper. Original Copy
LTRR selected
Auto XY Zoom
LTRR LTR
IMPORTANT
You cannot copy highly transparent originals, such as transparencies, in the Auto XY Zoom mode. To make copies, specify the copy ratio.
NOTE
If you set the Auto XY Zoom mode, select the paper size by Manual Paper Selection. If you do not select the paper size, the copy ratio is automatically set to the size of the paper set in a certain paper drawer. If you specify a magnication of smaller than 25%, a message telling you to set it to 25% will appear. If it is larger than 400%, a message telling you to set it to 400% will appear. If an error occurs between the Auto XY Zoom copy ratio and the actual copy size, you can adjust this with the Zoom Fine Adjustment function. (See Fine-adjusting Zoom When Differences in Original Image and Print Image Occur, on p. 6-31.) When you set the copy ratio in Auto XY Zoom mode, the Auto Orientation will not be performed.
2-29
Basic Copying
Basic Copying
Press the [X] and [Y] keys and enter each value for X and Y. Then press the [OK] key. NOTE
If you select the [Auto XY Zoom] key, select a paper size other than the Auto. If you select the Auto, the copy ratio is automatically set to the size of the paper in a certain paper drawer. You can enter the value using the Numeric keys ( 0 - 9 ) on the control panel. If you make a mistake when entering values, press the [C] key on the touch panel, and enter the correct values. Even if you entered the copy ratio with the Numeric keys ( 0 - 9 ), you can change the entered values with the [] and [+] keys. If you enter a value outside the setting range, a message prompting you to enter the appropriate value will appear on the screen.
2-30
NOTE Basic Copying Changing the Copy Ratio (Copy Ratio) 2-31
When you select the [Auto XY Zoom] key in the following cases, X: Auto% and Y: Auto% are displayed as the copy ratios on the Basic Features screen. - When the original is placed in the feeder. - When the original whose size cannot be detected is placed on the platen glass.

Place the original on the platen glass if the zoom ratio is more than 200%. To return the copy ratio to 100%, press the [Direct] key. To cancel the setting, press the [Copy Ratio], [Other Zoom], [XY Zoom], and [Cancel] keys in that order. You can also cancel the mode by pressing the key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.)
Reset
Adjusting Exposure and Image Quality (Copy Exposure)

You can adjust the exposure and image quality when scanning the original you want to copy. NOTE
You can also change the exposure during printing. (See Changing the Exposure During Printing, on p. 5-2.)
Basic Copying
Adjusting Copy Exposure

You can manually adjust the exposure to the most appropriate level for the original.
Place your originals and press the [Light] or [Dark] key. NOTE
Move the indicator above the [Light] and [Dark] keys to the left to make the exposure lighter or to the right to make the exposure darker.
Copy Exposure Dark Light

Reset
2-32
Selecting Image Quality

You can adjust image quality to the level best suited to the quality of text or photo originals. The following three modes are available for adjusting image quality. Text mode Text/Photo mode Photo mode
Text mode This mode is best suited for making copies from text originals. Blue prints or penciled originals can be copied clearly. Text/Photo mode This mode is best suited for making copies from originals containing both text and photos. Photo mode This mode is best suited for making copies from photos printed on photographic paper, or photo originals containing half-tones (i.e. printed photos). IMPORTANT
If you make copies of an original containing half-tones such as a printed photograph using the Photo mode, moir may occur. If this happens, you can soften this moir effect by using the Sharpness mode. (See Making Sharp Contrast Copies (Sharpness), on p. 3-67.) Combinations of these three modes cannot be set. If you select one of these modes, the previously set mode is canceled.
NOTE
When you have selected the Text, Text/Photo or Photo mode, the exposure can be adjusted only by Manual Exposure Control. Automatic Exposure Control cannot be selected. When the Photo Mode of Copy Settings is On, you can select printed image or photo after pressing the [ ] key. (See Setting the Photo Mode of the Copy Function, on p. 6-41.) If the original is a transparency, select the Text, Text/Photo or Photo mode and adjust the exposure to the most appropriate level.
2-33
Basic Copying
The worlds coral reefs, where brilliantly colored fish and a Text of other tropical creatures myriad Text/Photo come together. Aptly nicknamed Printed Img. Photo Forests under the sea, Tropical these spots of breathtaking beauty serve as home to countless varieties of life, and to us of the land, this alluring, dream-like world forms a tropical paradise filled with romance.
Place your original and press the [
] key.
Basic Copying
Select the type of original (Text, Text/Photo, Photo).
When the Photo Mode of Copy Settings is set to On, you can select the [Printed Img.] or [Photo] key. (See Setting the Photo Mode of the Copy Function, on p. 6-41.)
Press the [Light] or [Dark] key to adjust the copy exposure. NOTE
2-34

To cancel the setting, press the [A] key. You can cancel the mode by pressing the
Reset
Automatic Adjustment of Exposure and Image Quality

Place your originals and press the [A] key. The exposure is automatically adjusted to the level best suited to the quality of the original. NOTE
If the original is a transparency, you may not be able to use Automatic Exposure Control. If so, adjust the exposure using Manual Exposure Control.
A

Reset
2-35
Basic Copying
Entering the Copy Quantity

Specifying the Required Number of Copies
NOTE
Up to 999 copies can be set. The maximum number of copies can also be changed. For details, contact your service representative.
Basic Copying
Press the Numeric keys ( 0 - 9 ) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 999). IMPORTANT
You cannot change the copy quantity during copying.
Reset
1
Guide
2 5 8 0
3
Start
?
4 7
6 9
Clear
NOTE
The maximum copy quantity varies according to the copy job settings. The copy quantity appears in the upper right side of the touch panel display.
Interrupt
ID
2-36
Changing the Copy Quantity
Clear
Press the
key to clear the entered number.

0
1
Guide
2 5 8 0
3
Start
Stop
Then press the Numeric keys ( copy quantity again (1 to 999). IMPORTANT
) to enter the
?
nal Functions
4 7
6 9
Clear
nterrupt
You cannot change the copy quantity during copying.
ID
Processing /Data
Error
Power
NOTE
The copy quantity appears in the upper right side of the touch panel display.
2-37
Basic Copying
Two-sided Copying (Two-sided Mode)

IMPORTANT
In the Two-sided Mode, combined use with the Two-page Separation, Booklet, Transparency Interleaving, Image Combination, and Image Separation modes cannot be set. In the Book 2-Sided mode, combined use with the Cover/Sheet Insertion, Binding Erase, Different Size Originals, and Image Repeat modes in addition to the modes mentioned above cannot be set. Non-standard paper sizes cannot be used to make two-sided copies.
NOTE
When copying with Two-sided Mode, align the top edge of the original with the back edge of the platen glass or the feeder. The Two-sided Mode that you have set is displayed above the [Two-sided Mode] key in the Basic Features screen. Paper used to make two-sided copies must conform to the following specications: - Paper size : 11"x17"/ LGL/ LTR/ LTRR/ STMTR - Paper weight : 17-lb bond to 110-lb index (64 g/m2 to 200 g/m2) There are some types of paper which may meet the above specications, but cannot be used to make two-sided copies.
Basic Copying
Making Two-sided Copies from One-sided Originals (1 2-Sided)

This feature enables you to make two-sided copies from one-sided originals. Original Copy
12-Sided Two-sided Mode
IMPORTANT
Place the original horizontally when copying originals such as LTRR/ STMTR-size originals. If these originals are placed vertically, the back side of the copy will be printed upside down.
NOTE
If there are an odd number of originals, the back of the last print is left blank. (The machines counter does not count the blank page as a copy.) When combined with Different Size Originals, two-sided copying cannot be performed. The different-sized originals will be printed as one-sided copies on their respective sizes. When wanting to make copies on both sides of the paper with different-sized originals, make sure to select the paper size you want to print on, before printing.
2-38
Place your originals and press the [Two-sided Mode] key.
Press the [1 2-Sided] key.
When you select the [Option] key: Select the type of two-sided orientation, and press the [Done] key.
Press the [OK] key.
2-39
Basic Copying
The display returns to the Basic Features screen, and 1 2-Sided is displayed above the [Two-sided Mode] key.
Basic Copying

When the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on the screen and press the key once for each original. When scanning is completed, press the [Done] key. To cancel the setting, press the [Two-sided Mode] and [Cancel] keys in that order. You can also cancel the mode by pressing the key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.)
Start Reset
Making Two-sided Copies from Two-sided Originals (2 2Sided)

This feature automatically turns over two-sided originals placed in the feeder to make two-sided copies. Original Copy
22-Sided
2-40
Place your originals in the feeder and press the [Two-sided Mode] key. NOTE
When you select the [Option] key: Select the type of two-sided orientation for original and copy paper, and press the [Done] key.
2-41
Basic Copying
Press the [OK] key.
Basic Copying

When the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on the screen and press the key once for each original. When scanning is completed, press the [Done] key. To cancel the setting, press the [Two-sided Mode] and [Cancel] keys in that order. You can also cancel the mode by pressing the key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.)
Start Reset
2-42
Making One-sided Copies from Two-sided Originals (2 1Sided)

This feature automatically turns over two-sided originals placed in the feeder to make one-sided copies. Original Copy
21-Sided
IMPORTANT
Place the original horizontally when copying original such as LTRR/ STMTR-size original. If these originals are placed vertically, the back side of the copy will be printed upside down.
NOTE
When copying two-sided original placed on the platen glass on one side of different sheets, set the Job Build mode. (See Copying Separately-Set Originals (Job Build), on p. 3-45.)
Place your originals in the feeder and press the [Two-sided Mode] key. NOTE
2-43
Basic Copying
When you press the [Option] key: Select the type of original, and press the [Done] key.
Basic Copying
Press the [OK] key.

To cancel the setting, press the [Two-sided Mode] and [Cancel] keys in that order. You can also cancel the mode by pressing the key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.)
Reset
2-44
Making Two-sided Copies from Facing Pages in a Book (Book 2-Sided)

This feature enables you to make two-sided copies from facing pages or front and back sides of a page in a bound original, such as a book or a magazine. Left/Right Two-sided Original
1
Book 2-Sided
Copy
1 Front/Back Two-sided Original
Copy
IMPORTANT
Place the originals on the platen glass. You cannot place the original in the feeder and copy it in the Book 2-Sided mode. When using this feature, select LTR-size paper. When copying with Front/Back Two-sided, the front side of the rst two-sided page and the back side of the last two-sided page are left blank. The machines counter does not count the blank page as a copy.
2-45
Basic Copying
Place your original on the platen glass and press the [Two-sided Mode] key. NOTE
If you want to make copies in page order, begin copying from the rst page and work your way forward. Place the original face down so that its top edge is aligned with the back edge of the platen glass.
Basic Copying
Press the [Book 2-Sided] key, and press the [Next] key.
Select the type of layout, and press the [OK] key. NOTE
If you select the [Left/Right Two-sided] key, the facing pages are copied onto the front and back sides of a single sheet. If you select the [Front/Back Two-sided] key, the front and back sides of the left page, or the front and back sides of the right page are copied onto the front and back sides of a single sheet.
The display returns to the Basic Features screen and Book 2-Sided is displayed above the [Twosided Mode] key.
2-46
Proceed to make copies in the usual way. To scan the next two facing pages, place the original and press the key again. When scanning is completed, press the [Done] key.
Start
NOTE
To cancel the setting, press the [Two-sided Mode] and [Cancel] keys in that order. You can also cancel the mode by pressing the key. (The machine returns to the standard mode.)
Reset
2-47
Basic Copying
Collating Copies (Finisher)

The Finisher mode can be selected to collate the copies in various ways by pages or copy sets. The copied papers are output face down. When Collate is set: Copies are automatically collated into sets arranged in page order, and output onto the trays as follows. Originals Basic Copying Three sets of copies specified
Collate Finisher
Copy set 1
Copy set 2
Copy set 3
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
When Group is set: All copies of the same original page are automatically collated and grouped together, and output onto the trays as follows. Originals Three sets of copies specified
Group
Grouped Grouped Grouped Grouped copies of page 1 copies of page 2 copies of page 3 copies of page 4
1 2 3 4
1 1 1
2 2 2
3 3 3
4 4 4
When Staple is set: Copies are automatically collated into sets arranged in page order, output onto the trays as shown below, and then automatically stapled. When you select the [Corner] (TopLeft) key: Originals Three sets of copies specified
Staple
Copy set 1
Copy set 2
Copy set 3
1 2 3 4
2-48
When you select the [Double] (Left) key: Originals Three sets of copies specified
Staple
Copy set 1
Copy set 2
Copy set 3
1 2 3 4
When you select the [Saddle Stitch] key: Originals Three sets of copies specified Copy set 1 Copy set 2 Copy set 3
8
5
8
4
1
6 3
8
6 3
8
6 3
IMPORTANT
[Staple] can only be specied when the machine is equipped with the Finisher (option). You cannot set the Staple mode when copying on transparencies, tracing papers, labels, and 3-hole punch. [Saddle Stitch] can only be specied when the Saddle Finisher-F2 (option) is attached. Paper sizes which can be saddle stitched are 11"x17"/ LTRR. The maximum number of sheets that can be bound at a time is 15.
NOTE
Place the originals to be nished into a booklet as shown in the illustration above. (See Making Copies for Use as a Booklet (Booklet), on p. 3-9.) [Saddle Stitch] can only be set when the 1 2-Sided or 2 2-Sided mode is selected. (See Two-sided Copying (Two-sided Mode), on p. 2-38.)
When Non-collate is set (none of the above (Collate, Group or Staple) are set): Originals Copies
Non-collate
1 2 3 4
3 4
2-49
Basic Copying
When Hole Punch is set: Punches 2 or 3 holes in the copied sheets. When you select 11"x17"/ LTR-size paper: Original
Hole Punch
Copy
1 2 3 4
Basic Copying
IMPORTANT
[Hole Punch] can only be specied when the Finisher is equipped with the Puncher Unit-B1. The machine automatically selects the type of hole punch (2 or 3 holes) depending on the selected paper size. - 2 holes: LGL/ LTRR - 3 holes: 11"x17"/ LTR Holes cannot be punched in transparencies, tracing papers, labels, and 3-hole punch.
When Rotate is set: When originals of the same size are placed, the pages are aligned and the copy sets are delivered in alternating directions. Original Copy
Rotate
1
1 2 3 4
1
IMPORTANT
You can only select LTR/ LTRR-size paper. [Rotate] can only be specied when the machine is not equipped with the Finisher (option).
When Offset is set: Copies are shifted to the front and back respectively. Original Copy
Rotate
1 2 3 4
1 1
IMPORTANT
[Offset] can only be specied when the machine is equipped with the Finisher (option). You cannot select STMTR-size paper.
2-50
Place your originals in the feeder and press the [Finisher] key. NOTE
When Auto Collate is set to On, the Offset Collate mode is automatically set at the point when you place the originals in the feeder. (See Setting Automatic Collate On/ Off, on p. 6-37.)
Select the desired collate feature, and press the [OK] key. NOTE
When you select the [Staple] key, press the [Next] key. The [Staple] key only appears when the Finisher (option) is attached. The [Rotate] key only appears when the Finisher (option) is not attached. The [Hole Punch] key only appears when a Puncher Unit-B1 is attached to the Finisher. The [Offset] key only appears when the Finisher (option) is attached.
When the Finisher is attached.
When you select the [Staple] key: Select the type of stapling ([Corner], [Double], [Saddle Stitch]) and the position to be stapled, and press the [OK] key. IMPORTANT
The maximum number of papers which can be stapled at a time is as follows: - 11"x17"/ LGL/ LTRR : 30 sheets - LTR : 50 sheets
When the Finisher is not attached.
When you select the [Corner] key: Select the staple position, and press the [OK] key. IMPORTANT
STMTR-size paper cannot be corner-stapled.
2-51
Basic Copying
When you select the [Double] key: Select the staple position, and press the [OK] key. IMPORTANT
LGL/ LTRR/ STMTR-size papers cannot be doublestapled.
Basic Copying
When you select the [Saddle Stitch] key: Press the [Next] key. IMPORTANT
[Saddle Stitch] can only be specied when the Saddle Finisher-F2 (option) is attached. LGL/ LTR/ STMTR-size papers cannot be saddle stitched.
NOTE
You can adjust the saddle stitch position. (See Changing the Saddle Stitch Position, on p. 6-33.)
Select the paper size, and press the [OK] key.
When you select the [Rotate] key: When the Automatic Paper Selection is set, press the [Next] key. Then select the LTR or LTRR-size paper, and press the [OK] key. NOTE
Press the [OK] key after selecting the [Rotate] key in the following cases: - Available paper size is selected manually. - Available paper size is loaded for both horizontal and vertical direction. - Drawer Eligibility for APS/ADS of the paper drawers loaded with available paper size is set to On.
2-52
When you select the [Hole Punch] key: Punches holes (2 or 3 holes) in the printed sheets. IMPORTANT
The machine automatically selects the type of hole punch (2 or 3 holes) depending on the selected paper size. - 2 holes: LGL/ LTRR - 3 holes: 11"x17"/ LTR You cannot punch holes in STMTR-size paper.
The display returns to the Basic Features screen and the selected feature is displayed above the [Finisher] key.
When the Offset Collate is set.

When the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on the screen and press the key once for each original. When scanning is completed, press the [Done] key. To cancel the setting, press the [Finisher] and [Cancel] keys in that order. You can also cancel the mode by pressing the key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.)
Start Reset
2-53
Basic Copying
Checking a Sample Set Before Copying (Sample Set)

Before making multiple copies, the copying result can be checked using the Sample Set mode. NOTE
The machines counter counts the sample print as a print.
1
Basic Copying
Place your originals and program the copy settings. NOTE

The [Sample Set] key is displayed when you set a multiple number of copy sets in the Collate, Staple or Cover/Sheet Insertion modes. This key is not displayed when you set the Group mode.
Sample Set
Press the [Sample Set] key, then press the

Start
key.
Sample Set copying starts and one copy set is made.
2-54
Check the output sheet, and select the [Start Print], [Cancel] or [Change Settings] key. NOTE
To make the remaining copies, press the [Start Print] key. To cancel copying, press the [Cancel] key. To change copy settings, press the [Change Settings] key.
When you select the [Change Settings] key: Change the settings, and press the [Done] key. NOTE
To change the number of copies, use the Numeric keys ( 0 - 9 ). To change the exposure, press the [Light] or [Dark] key. To make two-sided copy, press the [2-Sided Copy] key. To select the copy paper, press the [Paper Select] key. (See Selecting the Copy Paper Size (Paper Select), on p. 2-9.) To collate the copied papers, press the [Finisher] key. (See Collating Copies (Finisher), on p. 2-48.) To set a margin for binding, press the [Margin] key. (See Making Copies with Margins (Margin), on p. 3-21.) When you change the copy settings, the machine starts printing from the rst set.
To copy another sample set, press the [Sample Set] key. Sample set copying starts and one copy set is made.
2-55
Basic Copying
Checking the Copy Mode Settings (Setting Conrmation)

When the copy mode settings are selected on the Special Features screen etc., you can check the current settings.
1
Basic Copying
Press the [Setting Conrmation] key on the Basic Features screen. The display shows the selected copy mode settings.
Setting Confirmation
Check the settings, then press the [Done] key. The display returns to the Basic Features screen. NOTE
When ten or more copy modes have been set, use the [ ] key to bring up the next screen. To return to the previous screen, press the [ ] key. The [ ] mark in some keys indicates that those keys have another screen to set their functions.
2-56
Checking the Copy Mode Settings (Setting Confirmation)
Changing or Canceling a Selected Copy Mode

(Setting Conrmation/Cancel)
From the Setting Conrmation screen, you can also change or cancel selected functions.
Press the [Setting Conrmation] key on the Basic Features screen. The display shows the selected copy mode settings. Basic Copying
Press the key for the copy mode you want to change or cancel. The copy mode settings screen appears. NOTE
When ten or more copy modes have been set, use the [ ] key to bring up the next screen. To return to the previous screen, press the [ ] key. The [ ] mark in some keys indicates that those keys have another screen to set their functions. Keys which do not have the [ ] mark on the bottom right can be canceled by pressing the keys again.
To change a mode (example: Sharpness) Perform the same steps as when setting the mode. Change the setting as you desire, then press the [OK] key. The display returns to the Setting Conrmation screen.
Changing or Canceling a Selected Copy Mode (Setting Confirmation/Cancel)
2-57
To cancel a mode Press the [Cancel] key. The display returns to the Setting Conrmation screen.
Basic Copying
Press the [Done] key. The display returns to the Basic Features screen.
2
2-58
Changing or Canceling a Selected Copy Mode (Setting Confirmation/Cancel)

This chapter describes more advanced copy functions.
CH APTER
Making Copies of Facing Pages in a Book onto Two Separate Copy Sheets (Two-page Separation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Adding Front and Back Covers, Insertion Sheets and Chapter Pages to Copy Sets (Cover/Sheet Insertion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Making Copies for Use as a Booklet (Booklet). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Making Copies with Sheets of Paper Interleaved between Transparencies (Transparency Interleaving) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Making Copies with Original Image Shifted (Shift). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Making Copies with Original Image Shifted to the Center or a Corner . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 Making Copies with Original Image Using the Numeric Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18 Making Copies with Margins (Margin) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 Erasing Shadows and Frame Lines from Copies (Frame Erase) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Making Copies Erasing the Frame of the Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Making Copies Erasing the Book Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Making Copies Erasing Binding holes etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24 3-26 3-28 3-31 Useful Copy Functions 3-1
Reducing Two, Four or Eight Originals to Fit on a Single Copy Sheet (Image Combination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33 Dividing an Original Into Equal Sections and Enlarging Each Section on a Separate Copy Sheet (Image Separation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38 Feeding Different-size Originals Together in the Feeder (Different Size Originals) . . . . 3-43 Copying Separately-Set Originals (Job Build) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45 Storing/ Recalling Often Used Copy Settings in Memory (Mode Memory) . . . . . . . . . . Storing Copy Settings for a Copy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storing a Memory Key Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recalling a Copy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Erasing a Copy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48 3-48 3-51 3-53 3-55
Recalling a Previous Copy Job (Recall) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58 Inverting Original Images (Nega/Posi) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60 Making Copies with the Original Image Repeated (Image Repeat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62 Making Copies with Image Reversed (Mirror Image) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65 Making Sharp Contrast Copies (Sharpness) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
Making Copies of Facing Pages in a Book onto Two Separate Copy Sheets (Two-page Separation)
This feature enables you to copy facing pages in a book or a magazine on separate sheets of paper. Original
1
Two-page Separation
Copy
1
IMPORTANT
In the Two-page Separation mode, combined use with the Two-sided, Cover/Sheet Insertion, Booklet, Transparency Interleaving, Binding Erase, Different Size Originals, Image Combination, Image Separation, and Image Repeat modes cannot be set. Place the original on the platen glass. You cannot place the original in the feeder and copy it in the Twopage Separation mode. When copying facing pages with the two-sided mode, copy them with the Book 2-Sided mode. (See Making Two-sided Copies from Facing Pages in a Book (Book 2-Sided), on p. 2-45.)
Place your original on the platen glass and press the [Special Features] key. NOTE
If you want to make copies in page order, begin copying from the rst pages and work your way forward. Place the original face down with the originals top edge is against the back edge of the platen glass.
Press the [Two-page Separation] key.
3-2
Proceed to make copies in the usual way. For the next two facing pages, place the original and press the When scanning is completed, press the [Done] key. NOTE
To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [Two-page Separation], and [Cancel] keys in that order. You can also cancel the mode by pressing the key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.)
Reset
key again.
3-3
Start
Adding Front and Back Covers, Insertion Sheets and Chapter Pages to Copy Sets (Cover/Sheet Insertion)
This function enables you to program the machine to automatically add front and back covers, insertion sheets or chapter pages using a different type of paper stock from which is used for the main text. In addition, the front and back covers and insertion sheets can also be copied. IMPORTANT
In the Cover/Sheet Insertion mode, combined use with the Group, Offset Group, Memory Collating, Memory Grouping, Book 2-Sided, Two-page Separation, Booklet, Transparency Interleaving, Image Combination, Image Separation, Image Repeat, and Mirror Image modes cannot be set. Stapling is not possible when the total number of output papers including insertion sheets exceeds 30 sheets (for 11"x17"/ LGL/ LTRR size) or 50 sheets (for LTR size).
NOTE Useful Copy Functions

When copying on the front and back covers/ insertion sheets, those sheets are included in the count of the total number of copies. Chapter pages are included in the count of the total number of copies.
Front Cover Adds a front cover sheet to each set of copies. The cover sheet can also be copied. Originals
REPORT
Cover/Sheet Insertion
Copy
REPORT
Printed front cover selected in the Cover/Sheet Insertion mode. Back Cover Adds a back cover sheet to each set of copies. The back cover can also be copied. Originals
REPORT
Copy
REPORT
Printed back cover selected in the Cover/Sheet Insertion mode.
3-4
Sheet Insertion Adds insertion sheets between the pages of copy sets. It is useful when you want to divide your copy sets into different sections with a blank sheet. The insertion sheets can also be copied. Originals
REPORT
Copy
REPORT
Printed insertion sheets selected in the Cover/Sheet Insertion mode. Chapter Page Adds chapter pages between the pages of copy sets. Since the chapter page is always copied on one side, it is useful when you want to divide the copy by chapter. Originals
REPORT
Copy
REPORT
Printed chapter page selected in the Cover/Sheet Insertion mode.
Place your originals in the feeder and press the [Special Features] key. NOTE
3-5
Press the [Cover/Sheet Insertion] key.
3
Select the Cover/Sheet Insertion feature you want to use, and press the [Next] key. When you select only the [Chapter Page] mode, proceed to step 5. (When you select the [Sheet Insertion] or [Chapter Page] mode.) NOTE
You cannot select the [Sheet Insertion] and [Chapter Page] modes at the same time. You can cancel a mode by pressing the mode key again.
When copying onto the front cover, back cover or insertion sheet, press the [Printed] key, and press the [Next] key.
NOTE
The display will vary depending on the setting in step 3. The chapter page will always be copied only on one side.
3-6
Make the following settings depending on the mode selected. NOTE

The display will vary depending on the mode selected.
When you select the [Back Cover] key: Select the side to be copied onto, and press the [Next] key.
When you select the [Sheet Insertion (Printed)], [Chapter Page] key: Set all positions where the sheet is to be inserted into the copies, and press the [Next] key. Specify the sheet insertion positions with the Numeric keys ( 0 - 9 ). NOTE
You can insert up to 20 insertion sheets (or chapter pages). If you want to insert 6 or more sheets, use the [ ] or [ ] keys to scroll to the insertion positions. You cannot specify the sheet insertion position to the rst page. Set the position starting from the second page. To cancel a specic sheet insertion page setting, press the [ ] or [ ] key and press the desired page, then press the C key.
Clear
When you select the Two-sided Mode: Press the [Option] key.
3-7
Select the side to be copied onto, and press the [Done] key.
6
Select the paper source for each insertion sheet, and press the [OK] key. NOTE
Select the same paper size for the front and back cover, insertion sheets (or chapter page.) The display will vary depending on the mode selected.

When the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on the display and press the key once for each original. When scanning is completed, press the [Done] key. To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [Cover/Sheet Insertion], and [Cancel] keys in that order. You can also cancel the mode by pressing the key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.)
Start Reset
3-8
Making Copies for Use as a Booklet (Booklet)

You can copy one-sided or two-sided originals in such a way that the copies can be easily made into a booklet. Originals Copy
1 2 3 4
2
Booklet
8
5
1
8
4
1
6 3
5 6 7 8
When the Saddle Finisher-F2 is attached.
IMPORTANT
In the Booklet mode, combined use with the Entire Image, Finisher, Two-sided, Two-page Separation, Cover/Sheet Insertion, Transparency Interleaving, Margin, Frame Erase, Different Size Originals, Image Combination, Image Separation, Image Repeat, and Mirror Image modes cannot be set. When you place the originals used in the vertical direction horizontally and scan them, the images of the even number pages will be printed upside down. Saddle stitching will not be performed when there is only one sheet. The sheet will only be folded.
3-9
Press the [Booklet] key.
3
Select the original size, and press the [Next] key. NOTE
To copy two-sided originals, also press the [2-Sided Original] key. To select A or B series paper size, press the [A/Bsize] key.
When you select the [2-Sided Original] key: Select the type of the original, and press the [OK] key.
3-10
Select the paper size, and press the [Next] key. Press the [OK] key, and proceed to step 7 when the Saddle Finisher-F2 (option) is not attached. IMPORTANT
The paper used for the cover page must be the same size as the other pages. The paper used for the main text must be from 17-lb to 20-lb bond (64 g/m2 to 80 g/m2). The paper used for the cover page must not be heavier than 110-lb index (200 g/m2). When you select the [Add Cover] key, you cannot set the paper used for the main text in the stack bypass.
NOTE
To add a cover page, press the [Add Cover] key. Place the paper face down for the cover page in the stack bypass. The cover page can only be copied on the front. 11"x17"/ LTRR-size paper can be selected.
When you select the [Add Cover] key: Select the [On] or [Off] key to set whether or not to copy on the cover, and press the [Next] key.
Select the type of paper, and press the [Next] key. Press the [OK] key, and proceed to step 7 when the Saddle Finisher-F2 (option) is not attached.
3-11
Select whether or not to saddle stitch the booklet, and press the [OK] key. The display returns to the Special Features screen. IMPORTANT
The saddle stitching cannot be set when the Saddle Finisher-F2 (option) is not attached. When the number of sheet exceeds 15, the stapling will not be performed, and the sheets will be output to the tray.
NOTE Useful Copy Functions

The available number of output load on the booklet tray in the saddle stitching is as follows: - Number of sheets Number of load 1- 5 25 sets 6-10 15 sets 11-15 10 sets Saddle stitching will not be performed when there is only one sheet. The sheet will only be folded.
Press the [Done] key. The display returns to the Basic Features screen. NOTE
When you set the Booklet mode, the Shift mode is automatically set.

When the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on the display and press the key once for each original. When scanning is completed, press the [Done] key. To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [Booklet], and [Cancel] keys in that order. You can also cancel the mode by pressing the key. (The machine returns to the standard mode.)
Start Reset
3-12
Making Copies with Sheets of Paper Interleaved between Transparencies (Transparency Interleaving)
Use this mode when copying onto transparencies fed from the stack bypass. The machine automatically interleaves a sheet of paper between each transparency. The interleaf sheets protect the copied surface of the transparencies. They can also either be printed with the same images as the transparencies or left blank. Blank interleaf sheets selected in the Transparency Interleaving mode. Originals Copy
REPORT REPORT
Transparency
Blank interleaf sheets
Printed interleaf sheets selected in the Transparency Interleaving mode. Originals

REPORT
Copy
REPORT REPORT
Transparency
Printed interleaf sheets
IMPORTANT
In the Transparency Interleaving mode, combined use with the Finisher, Two-sided, Two-page Separation, Cover/Sheet Insertion, Booklet, Image Combination, Image Separation, and Image Repeat modes cannot be set. You cannot make more than one set of copies at a time in the Transparency Interleaving mode. Even if your machine is equipped with the Finisher, you cannot use any of the Finisher modes with the Transparency Interleaving mode.
NOTE
The machines counter does not count blank interleaf sheets as copies.
3-13
Transparency terleaving
In-
2
Press the [Transparency Interleaving] key.
Select the size of the transparencies, and press the [Next] key.
Select the size of interleaf sheet, and press the [Next] key.
3-14
Select whether or not to copy the image onto the interleaf sheet, and press the [OK] key. The display returns to the Special Features screen. NOTE
When copying interleaf sheets, those sheets are included in the count of the total number of copies.
Press the [Done] key. The display returns to the Basic Features screen. Useful Copy Functions 3-15
Place the transparency in the stack bypass, and proceed to make copies in the usual way. (See Making Copies Using the Stack Bypass, on p. 2-12.) NOTE
When the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on the display and press the key once for each original. When scanning is completed, press the [Done] key. In the Transparency Interleaving mode, the transparencies are fed from the stack bypass and the interleaf sheets are fed from the paper drawer. The copies are output with the copied side face down, with the transparency rst, followed by the interleaf sheet. To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [Transparency Interleaving], and [Cancel] keys in that order. You can also cancel the mode by pressing the key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.)
Start Reset
Making Copies with Original Image Shifted (Shift)

Center Shift Corner Shift Makes copies with the entire image shifted to the center or a corner. Original Copy with original image shifted to the center Copy with original image shifted to a corner
Shift
No Key Entry Makes copies with entire image shifted to a designated position with the Numeric keys. Original Copy
4-3/4"(120mm) 4-3/4"(120mm) 3-1/8"(80mm) 3-1/8"(80mm)
CITY
Move to designated area copy
CITY
NOTE
In the Shift mode, combined use with the Image Repeat and Mirror Image modes cannot be set. The Shift mode cannot be selected when you set the Different Size Originals mode in combination with the Automatic Paper Selection.
3-16
Making Copies with Original Image Shifted to the Center or a Corner
Place your original and press the [Special Features] key.
Press the [Shift] key.
Press the [Center Shift Corner Shift] key.
3-17
Select the shift direction by using the arrow keys, and press the [OK] key. The display returns to the Special Features screen. NOTE
Shift direction dose not refer to the direction in which the original is placed on the platen glass or in the feeder, but to the direction that you want the original shifted, if the original document that you want to scan is viewed as face up and situated in the center of the copy page. The center position is the default.

To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [Shift], and [Cancel] keys in that order. You can also cancel the mode by pressing the key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.)
Reset
Making Copies with Original Image Using the Numeric Keys
3-18
Press the [Shift] key.
Press the [No Key Entry] key. Useful Copy Functions
Select the shift direction, then enter the value using the Numeric keys ( 0 - 9 ). NOTE
Shift direction does not refer to the direction in which the original is placed on the platen glass or in the feeder, but to the direction that you want the original shifted, if the original document that you want to scan is viewed as face up and situated in the center of the copy page. The center position is the default. If you enter a value outside the setting range, a message prompting you to enter the appropriate value will appear on the screen. To change an entered value, select the direction and enter the desired value again. If you make a mistake when entering values, press the C key on the touch panel, and enter the values again. If you want to enter values in millimeters, press the [mm] key. For details on how to enter the values in inches, see Setting in Inches, on p. 10-8.
Clear
3-19
Example: To move the image to the left: Press the [ ] key on the left to enter the value, and press the [OK] key. NOTE
Follow the same procedure when shifting to the right ,upper and lower sides.
Example: To move the image in a diagonal direction: Press the [ ] key on the upper or lower side to enter the value. Next, press the [ ] key on the right or left side to enter the value, and press the [OK] key.

To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [Shift], and [Cancel] keys in that order. You can also cancel the mode by pressing the key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.)
Reset
3-20
Making Copies with Margins (Margin)

This mode enables you to make copies with the entire original image shifted by a designated width to the left, right, top or bottom to create a margin on print sheets. Use this mode to make copies ready for placement in ring binders. Left margin selected Right margin selected Top margin selected Bottom margin selected
Original
Margin
IMPORTANT
In the Margin mode, combined use with the Booklet, Image Repeat, and Mirror Image modes cannot be set. When the Margin mode is set, the entire original image is shifted to the left, right, top or bottom by a selected width, then copied. When copying an original image that extends to the edge of the sheet, part of that image will be cut off.
Press the [Margin] key.
3-21
Select the type of margin, and press the [Next] key. IMPORTANT
If you are using the Margin and Two-sided modes together and copying an original that already has a margin, follow the instructions below: - 1 2-sided: Set the margin for the back only. - 2 2-sided: You do not need to set the margin. Proceed to make copies in the usual way. - 2 1-sided: Set the margin for the back only. If you are using the Margin and Two-sided modes together and copying an original that does not have a margin, follow the instructions below: - 1 2-sided: Set the margin for both the front and back. - 2 2-sided: Set the margin for both the front and back. - 2 1-sided: Set the margin for both the front and back.
When you select the [Left Margin] or [Right Margin] key: Use the [] and [+] keys to set the margin for the front and back (0" to 13/16"/ 0 to 20 mm). Then press the [OK] key. NOTE
If you want to enter values in millimeters, press the [mm] key. The default setting is 3/8" (10 mm).
When you select the [Top Margin] or [Bottom Margin] key: Use the [] and [+] keys to set the margin (1/16" to 13/16"/ 1 to 20 mm). Then press the [OK] key. NOTE
When entering values in millimeters, you can use the Numeric keys ( 0 - 9 ) and the C key on the control panel. If you enter a value outside the setting range, a message prompting you to enter the appropriate value will appear on the screen.
Clear
3-22

To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [Margin], and [Cancel] keys in that order. You can also cancel the mode by pressing the key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.)
Reset
3-23
Erasing Shadows and Frame Lines from Copies

(Frame Erase)
This mode erases shadows and lines that appear when copying various types of originals. The following three Frame Erase features are available. IMPORTANT
Combination of these three modes cannot be set. If you select one of these modes, the previously set mode is canceled.
Original Frame Erase Erases the dark borders and frame lines that appear around the printed paper when the original is smaller than the selected paper size. Also creates a blank border around the edge of the print paper. Useful Copy Functions IMPORTANT
In the Original Frame Erase mode, combined use with the Entire Image, Booklet, Image Combination, Image Separation, Image Repeat, and Mirror Image modes cannot be set.
Copy (LTR)
Original (STMT)
Original Frame Erase mode selected
Frame Erase
Copy (LTR)
Original Frame Erase mode not selected
3-24
Erasing Shadows and Frame Lines from Copies (Frame Erase)
Book Frame Erase Erases the dark border as well as center and contour lines that appear when copying facing pages in a bound original onto a single print paper. IMPORTANT
In the Book Frame Erase, combined use with the Entire Image, Booklet, Image Combination, Image Separation, Image Repeat, and Mirror Image modes cannot be set.
Copy Book Frame Erase selected Original
Copy Book Frame Erase not selected Useful Copy Functions
Binding Erase Erases the shadows that appear in copies from binding holes in originals. IMPORTANT
In the Binding Frame Erase mode, combined use with the Entire Image, Book 2-Sided, Two-page Separation, Booklet, Image Separation, Image Repeat, and Mirror Image modes cannot be set. Do not place originals with binding holes in the feeder, as this may damage the originals.
Copy Binding Erase mode selected Original
Copy Binding Erase mode not selected
3-25
Making Copies Erasing the Frame of the Originals
Place your originals and press the [Special Features] key.
Original Frame Erase
Press the [Frame Erase] key.
Press the [Original Frame Erase] key, and press the [Next] key.
Select the size of the original, and press the [Next] key. NOTE
You can set the Original Frame Erase mode only on original sizes shown in the touch panel display. To select A or B series paper size, press the [A/Bsize] key.
3-26
Set the desired original frame erase width using the [] or [+] key, and press the [OK] key. The value set here is specied uniformly around the original. To set frame erase width values for the top, bottom, left and right sides of the original independently, press the [Adjust Each Dim.] key. NOTE
When entering values in millimeters, you can use the Numeric keys ( 0 - 9 ) and the C key on the control panel. If you enter a value outside the setting range, a message prompting you to enter the appropriate value will appear on the screen. Even when you enter the values with the Numeric keys ( 0 - 9 ), you can change the values with the [] or [+] key. If you want to enter values in millimeters, press the [mm] key. The default setting is 1/8" (4 mm).
Clear
When you select the [Adjust Each Dim.] key: Select each side in turn and set the frame erase width using the [] or [+] key, and press the [OK] key.
3-27

To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [Frame Erase], and [Cancel] keys in that order. You can also cancel the mode by pressing the key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.)
Reset
Making Copies Erasing the Book Frame
1

Book Erase Frame
Press the [Book Frame Erase] key, and press the [Next] key.
3-28
Select the size of the book when opened, and press the [Next] key. NOTE
The values set here are specied independently around the original. To set a value uniformly around the original, press the [Adjust All At Once] key. NOTE
When entering values in millimeters, you can use the Numeric keys ( 0 - 9 ) and the C key on the control panel. If you enter a value outside the setting range, a message prompting you to enter the appropriate value will appear on the screen. Even when you enter the values with the Numeric keys ( 0 - 9 ), you can change the values using the [] or [+] key. If you want to enter values in millimeters, press the [mm] key. The default settings are 3/8" (10 mm) for Center and 1/8" (4 mm) for Top, Left, Right and Bottom.
Clear
When you select the [Adjust All At Once] key: Press the [Sides] and [Center] key to set the desired frame erase width using the [] or [+] key, and press the [OK] key.
3-29
Press each key (Top, Left, Center, Right, and Bottom) and set the desired book frame erase width using the [] or [+] key, and press the [OK] key.
7

To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [Frame Erase], and [Cancel] keys in that order. You can also cancel the mode by pressing the key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.)
Reset
3
3-30
Making Copies Erasing Binding holes etc.
Place your originals on the platen glass and press the [Special Features] key.
Binding Erase
Press the [Binding Erase] key, and press the [Next] key.
Specify the binding erase feature, and press the [Next] key. NOTE
The position of the binding holes does not refer to the position in which the original is placed on the platen glass, but to the position of the binding holes viewed when the surface of the original that you want to scan is face up, with the top edge at the top.
3-31
Set the desired binding erase width using the [] or [+] key, and press the [OK] key. NOTE
When entering values in millimeters, you can use the Numeric keys ( 0 - 9 ) and the C key on the control panel. If you enter a value outside the setting range, a message prompting you to enter the appropriate value will appear on the screen. Even when you enter the values with the Numeric keys ( 0 - 9 ), you can change the values using the [] or [+] key. If you want to enter values in millimeters, press the [mm] key. The default setting is 3/4" (18 mm).
Clear

To cancel the setting, the [Special Features], [Frame Erase], and [Cancel] keys in that order. You can also cancel the mode by pressing the key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.)
Reset
3-32
Reducing Two, Four or Eight Originals to Fit on a Single Copy Sheet (Image Combination)
This mode automatically reduces two, four, or eight originals, two-sided originals, or the facing pages of a book to t on one side or both sides of a selected paper size. IMPORTANT
In the Image Combination mode, combined use with the Entire Image, Two-sided, Two-page Separation, Cover/Sheet Insertion, Booklet, Transparency Interleaving, Original Frame Erase, Book Frame Erase, Different Size Originals, Image Separation, Image Repeat, and Mirror Image modes cannot be set. Originals copied in the Image Combination mode must all be the same size. You cannot use the Image Combination mode with the Different Size Originals mode.
NOTE
The reduction ratio is automatically set so that the originals t on the selected paper size.
2 On 1 Reduces two 1-sided or one 2-sided originals to t on one side or both sides of the sheet. Copy Originals
or
Image Combination
1
1 2
4 On 1 Reduces four 1-sided or two 2-sided originals to t on one side or both sides of the sheet. Originals Copy
or
1
3-33
8 On 1 Reduces eight 1-sided or four 2-sided originals to t on one side or both sides of the sheet. Originals
REPORT
Copy
REPORT
1
or
1
6
REPORT
3
3
8
5 6 7 8
5
4
Press the [Image Combination] key.
3-34
Select the size of the originals, and press the [Next] key. NOTE
When copying the two-sided original with the Image Combination mode, press the [2-Sided Original] key after selecting the original size. To select A or B series paper size, press the [A/Bsize] key.
Select the desired Image Combination feature, and press the [Next] key. NOTE
To make a two-sided copy, press the [2-Sided Copy] key.
When you select the [2-Sided Copy] key: Select the type of two-sided orientation, and press the [OK] key.
3-35
When you select the [2-Sided Original] key: Select the type of original, and press the [OK] key.
When you select the [Option] key: Select the image order, and press the [Done] key.
2 On 1
4 On 1, 8 On 1
Select the paper size, and press the [OK] key. The display returns to the Special Features screen. IMPORTANT
You cannot set Automatic Paper Selection in the Image Combination mode.
NOTE
The machine automatically selects the copy ratio depending on the selected paper size.
Press the [Done] key. The display returns to the Basic Features screen. NOTE
When you set the Image Combination mode, the Shift mode is automatically set.
3-36

When the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on the display and press the key once for each original. When scanning is completed, press the [Done] key. To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [Image Combination], and [Cancel] keys in that order. You can also cancel the mode by pressing the key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.)
Start Reset
3-37
Dividing an Original Into Equal Sections and Enlarging Each Section on a Separate Copy Sheet (Image Separation)
This mode automatically divides an original into equal sections and copies each section in enlarged form on a separate sheet. IMPORTANT
In the Image Separation mode, combined use with the Entire Image, Two-sided, Two-page Separation, Cover/Sheet Insertion, Booklet, Transparency Interleaving, Frame Erase, Different Size Originals, Image Combination, and Image Repeat modes cannot be set. Originals copied in the Image Separation mode must all be the same size. You cannot use the Different Size Originals mode in combination with the Image Separation mode. Place the original on the platen glass. You cannot place the original in the feeder and copy it in the Image Separation mode.
The following Image Separation features are available: 1 to 2, 1 to 4, 2-Sided/ 1 to 2, and 2-Sided/ 1 to 4. NOTE
The enlargement ratio is automatically set to match the designated paper size.
1 to 2 Divides a one-sided original into two equal sections and outputs the sections in enlarged form as two 1-sided copies or one 2-sided copy. Original Copy
Image Separation
or
1 2
1 1 2
NOTE
You can place LTR-size originals horizontally or vertically when using this feature. When placed vertically, each page is divided into upper and lower sections.
3-38
1 to 4 Divides a one-sided original into four equal sections and outputs the sections in enlarged form as four 1-sided copies or two 2-sided copies. Original Copy
or
2 1
NOTE
You can place LTR-size originals horizontally or vertically when using this feature.
Place your originals on the platen glass and press the [Special Features] key.
Press the [Image Separation] key.
3-39
Select the desired Image Separation feature, and press the [Next] key. NOTE
To make two-sided copy, press the [2-Sided Copy] key.
When you select the [2-Sided Copy] key: Select the appropriate orientation, and press the [OK] key.
Select the layout for the last original, and press the [Next] key. NOTE
You can reduce the output of pages without images (blank output) by setting the layout of the last original.
1 To 2
1 To 4
3-40
When you select the [Option] key: Specify the image (print) order, and press the [Done] key.
1 To 2
1 To 4
Select the paper size, and press the [OK] key. The display returns to the Special Features screen. IMPORTANT
You cannot select the Automatic Paper Selection in the Image Separation mode.
NOTE
The machine automatically selects the copy ratio depending on the selected paper size.
3-41

When there are multiple originals, follow the instructions that appear on the display and press the key once for each original. When scanning is completed, press the [Done] key. To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [Image Separation], and [Cancel] keys in that order. You can also cancel the mode by pressing the key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.)
Reset Start
3
3-42
Feeding Different-size Originals Together in the Feeder (Different Size Originals)

This function enables you to copy different-size originals with the same width or different-size originals with different widths, together in one group. IMPORTANT
In the Different Size Originals mode, combined use with the Book 2-sided, Two-page Separation, Booklet, Image Combination, Image Separation, and Image Repeat modes cannot be set. All originals placed together in the feeder must be the same weight (paper type). Align the top edge of the originals with the back edge of the feeder when placing different-width originals. Set the different-size originals with the combinations as follows. Other combinations may damage the originals. - 11''x17'' and LGL, LTR and LGL, LTR and LTRR. When you place different-width originals, the originals may slightly be moved when fed to the platen glass, and as a result, the images may be scanned and copied slantwise. You cannot select the Shift mode when you set the Automatic Paper Selection in combination with the Different Size Originals mode. You cannot set the Staple mode when placing different-width originals. The Auto Orientation will not be performed when you set the Different Size Originals mode. When combined with 1to2-Sided originals, two-sided copying cannot be performed. The different-sized originals will be printed as one-sided copies on their respective sizes.
NOTE
Image Separation Different Size Originals
Press the [Different Size Originals] key.
3-43
Place your original in the feeder and press the [Special Features] key.
Select the type of the Different Size Originals, and press the [OK] key. The display returns to the Special Features screen. NOTE
When you set the same-width originals, press the [Same Width] key. When you set the different-width originals, press the [Different Width] key.
4

When the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on the display and press the key once for each original. When scanning is completed, press the [Done] key. To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [Different Size Originals], and [Cancel] keys in that order. You can also cancel the mode by pressing the key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.)
Start Reset
3-44
Copying Separately-Set Originals (Job Build)

This mode enables you to scan originals that are too many to set at once, by dividing them into multiple batches. You can use both the feeder and the platen glass for scanning. The originals are copied as one document after all the batches have been scanned. Originals Copies
Job Build
IMPORTANT
You cannot change the copy settings while scanning originals in the Job Build mode. You need to set the necessary settings beforehand according to the type of original or the desired Finisher mode. If you place the original in the feeder, remove the original sequentially from the original output area when scanning is completed. When you place different-size originals in the feeder, set the Different Size Originals mode.
NOTE
When you want to copy one-sided and two-sided originals as two-sided, set the 1 2-Sided mode beforehand if the rst batch of originals is one-sided. If the rst batch is two-sided, set the 2 2-Sided mode beforehand. To scan next original(s), set or cancel the Two-sided Original mode according to the type of original. It is useful to store originals in a box and print them with the Merge Documents mode when you cannot prepare originals at once, or when you want to set different settings for each original. (See Printing Multiple Documents as One Document (Merge Documents), on p. 4-75.)
Place your rst original and press the [Special Features] key.
3-45
Press the [Job Build] key.
3
Start
Press the inals. NOTE
key to start scanning the orig-
3
Start
Stop
You can adjust the Exposure and the Image Quality. (See Adjusting Exposure and Image Quality (Copy Exposure), on p. 2-32.) You can change the setting of the original type (One-sided/ Two-sided). (See Two-sided Copying (Two-sided Mode), on p. 2-38.) You can change the number of copy sets. (See Entering the Copy Quantity, on p. 2-36.) To cancel scanning, press the [Cancel] key or the key.
Stop
6 9
Clear
When scanning Two-sided originals: Press the [2-Sided] key. IMPORTANT

Do not forget to set or cancel the Two-sided Original mode according to the type of originals.
3-46
Select the type of two-sided original, and press the [OK] key.
When scanning is completed, set the next original. Useful Copy Functions
Repeat steps 4 and 5 until the last original is scanned, then press the [Done] key. NOTE
To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features] and [Job Build] keys in that order. You can also cancel the mode by pressing the key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.)
Reset
3-47
Storing/ Recalling Often Used Copy Settings in Memory (Mode Memory)

You can store any possible combination of the Copy functions, up to nine settings, in a memory key, and name that key. It is useful when you want to store the Copy functions used frequently. NOTE
The copy jobs stored in memory will not be erased even if you turn the power OFF. You can store all functions (modes) except for the Interrupt mode.
Storing Copy Settings for a Copy Mode

Program the copy job that you want to store in the Basic Features or Special Features screen.
Mode Memory
NOTE
In the display on the right, the Two-page Separation and Margin modes are set.
Press the [Mode Memory] key.
Press the [Store/Erase] key.
3-48
Press the [Store] key.
NOTE
The mode memory key where copy settings are already stored shows a small, black square [ ] in the lower right corner of the key. If you selected a memory key to which a copy mode has already been stored, its settings are displayed. If there are more stored copy modes than currently displayed, you can scroll the list using the [ ] or [ ] keys.
If you selected a memory key to which a copy mode has not yet been stored: The message to conrm whether or not you want to store the new copy setting is displayed. To store: Select the [Yes] key. The new copy job is stored to the memory key. To cancel storing: Select the [No] key, then select another key.
3-49
Select the desired memory key from among memory keys [M1] to [M9], and press the [Next] key.
If you selected a memory key to which a copy mode has already been stored: The message to conrm that you want to replace the old copy mode with the new copy mode is displayed. To overwrite: Select the [Yes] key. The contents of the memory key are replaced with the new copy setting. To cancel storing: Select the [No] key, then select another memory key. When storing is completed, the message Stored in memory. appears for about two seconds. Useful Copy Functions
When the copy settings are stored, the memory key storing the copy mode is highlighted and the stored settings are displayed.
Press the [OK] key. The display returns to the Special Features screen.
3-50
Press the [Special Features] key.
3-51
Storing a Memory Key Name
4
Press the [Store Name] key.
Select the memory key ([M1] to [M9]) for which you want to assign a name, and press the [Next] key. NOTE
The mode memory key where copy settings are already stored shows a small, black square [ ] in the lower right corner of the key. If you selected a memory key to which a copy mode has already been stored, its settings are displayed.
Enter the new name, and press the [OK] key. NOTE
For details on how to enter characters on the touch panel display, see Entering Characters on the Touch Panel Display, on p. 10-6. The maximum number of characters you can assign for the name is 10. If you press the [OK] key without any characters entered, the name of the memory key will revert back to its default setting, e.g. [M1] or [M2].
3-52
Recalling a Copy Mode
3
Select the memory key where the copy setting you want to recall is stored.
Check the copy settings stored to the memory key. If the contents are correct, press the [OK] key. The display returns to the Special Features screen. NOTE
Recalling a copy job from memory cancels the current copy mode. After recalling a copy job from memory, you can change its settings and make copies. If you press another memory key, the copy mode stored in that key is recalled.
3-54
Erasing a Copy Mode
Press the [Erase] key.
3-55
Select the memory key of the copy mode that you want to erase, and press the [Next] key. IMPORTANT
Check the copy settings before you erase them.
NOTE
The mode memory key where copy settings are already stored shows a small, black square [ ] in the lower right corner of the key. If you selected a memory key to which a copy mode has already been stored, its settings are displayed. If there are more stored copy modes than currently displayed, you can scroll the list using the [ ] or [ ] keys.
The message on the right appears to conrm that you want to erase the copy mode. Select the [Yes] key. The stored copy mode is erased. NOTE
The name of the memory key is not erased. For details on how to change the name, see Storing a Memory Key Name, on p. 3-51. If you want to cancel erasing, select the [No] key.
The message Erased. is displayed for about two seconds on the touch panel display.
3-56
Press the [Cancel] key. The display returns to the Special Features screen.
Recalling a Previous Copy Job (Recall)

You can recall up to three previously set copy modes and make copies using these settings. IMPORTANT
One copy job is dened by setting the number of copies, exposure, zoom etc., and pressing the or key when the Auto Clear function is on, or by calling up a copy job stored in memory. If one of these keys was not pressed, or if the Auto Clear function is not active, calling up a copy job by pressing the [Recall] key is not possible. Once stored, the three copy jobs are held in memory even if the power is turned OFF. The Standard mode is not stored. Copy modes already stored is not stored.
Reset Start

Recall
Press the [Recall] key.
3-58
Recalling a Previous Copy Job (Recall)
Select one of the [1 Before], [2 Before] or [3 Before] keys. Check that the copy settings are correct, and press the [OK] key. The display returns to the Special Features screen. NOTE
You can also check which copy modes are stored to memory other than the currently displayed copy mode by pressing the [ ] or [ ] key.
Press the [Done] key. The display returns to the Basic Features screen. Useful Copy Functions Recalling a Previous Copy Job (Recall) 3-59
Proceed to make copies in the usual way.
Inverting Original Images (Nega/Posi)

This function enables you to make copies of the original inverting the black and the white areas. Original Copy
SCENE
Nega/Posi
SCENE
Press the [] key to display the Special Features screen (2/2).
3-60
Press the [Nega/Posi] key.
Press the [Done] key. The display returns to the Basic Features screen. Useful Copy Functions Inverting Original Images (Nega/Posi) 3-61

To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [ ], and [Nega/Posi] keys in that order. You can also cancel the mode by pressing the key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.)
Reset
Making Copies with the Original Image Repeated

(Image Repeat)
You can repeatedly copy the image of an original in either the lengthwise or widthwise direction. The following two setting methods are available for the Image Repeat mode. Automatic setting The original image is copied so that the maximum possible of copies t in the selected paper size. Original Copy
CITY CITY
Image Repeat
CITY
Manual setting The original image is copied for the specied number of times. Original Copy
CITY
CITY
CITY CITY
Example : When 3 times is specified. *Images overlap when copied.
IMPORTANT
In the Image Repeat (manual setting) mode, combined use with the Entire Image, Book 2-Sided, Twopage Separation, Cover/Sheet Insertion, Shift, Booklet, Transparency Interleaving, Margin, Frame Erase, Different Size Originals, Image Combination, Image Separation, and Mirror Image modes cannot be set. In the Image Repeat (auto setting) mode, combined use with the Automatic Paper Selection and Auto modes in addition to the modes mentioned above cannot be set.
3-62
Making Copies with the Original Image Repeated (Image Repeat)
Press the [Image Repeat] key.
Set the number of Image repeat times for each of the lengthwise and widthwise directions. Automatic setting Press the [Auto] key. NOTE
To make repeated copies with the number of repeats automatically set, select the paper size. The original image is then copied so that the maximum possible number of copies t in the selected paper size.
3-63
Manual setting Press the [] or [+] key to set the number of images. NOTE
The number of times that the image can be set to repeat is from 1 to 20. Sometimes the designated image will overlap depending on how many times you have manually set it to be repeated.
5
Press the [OK] key. The display returns to the Special Features screen (2/2).

To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [ ], [Image Repeat], and [Cancel] keys in that order. You can also cancel the mode by pressing the key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.)
Reset
3-64
Making Copies with Image Reversed (Mirror Image)

This function copies images as if reected in the mirror, reversing the right and left sides. Original Copy
Mirror Image
IMPORTANT
In the Mirror Image mode, combined use with the Cover/Sheet Insertion, Shift, Booklet, Margin, Frame Erase, Image Combination, and Image Repeat modes cannot be set.
Place the original and press the [Special Features] key.
3-65
Press the [Mirror Image] key.
4

To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [ ], and [Mirror Image] keys in that order. You can also cancel the mode by pressing the key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.)
Reset
3-66
Making Sharp Contrast Copies (Sharpness)

This mode allows you to make copies of original images with the contrast reproduced sharper or softer. To make copies with text or lines reproduced sharper, use the [High] key. To make copies with photographs or other half-tones reproduced softer, use the [Low] key. Low If you make copies of an original containing half-tones such as a printed photograph using the Photo mode, moir or screen clash may occur. However, by using the [Low] key, you can soften this moir effect so that the copy is easier on the eyes. Original Low set Copy Low not set Useful Copy Functions 3-67
Sharpness
High This feature enhances the edges of original images so that faint or ne text is reproduced more sharply. This is particularly suited to blueprints or faint pencil-drawn originals. Original High set Copy High not set
2
Press the [Sharpness] key.
Use the [Low] or [High] key to adjust the sharpness, and press the [OK] key. The display returns to the Special Features screen (2/2). NOTE
To copy text and lines clearly, the setting should be towards High. To copy photographs etc., the setting should be towards Low.
3-68

To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [ ], [Sharpness], and [Cancel] keys in that order. You can also cancel the mode by pressing the key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.)
Reset
3-69
3
3-70
CH APTER
This chapter describes the Mail Box functions with which you can temporarily store data for later printing.
Flow of Mail Box Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Storing Originals in the Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Printing Documents Stored in the Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 Scanning Originals into a Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 Giving a Name to the Document to be Scanned (Document Name). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 Specifying Document Size (Doc. Size Select) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 Adjusting the Exposure and Image Quality before Scanning the Originals (Scanning Exposure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 Changing the Scanning Ratio (Copy Ratio). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 Scanning Two-sided Originals (Two-sided Original) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25 Scanning Facing Pages in a Book onto Two Separate Sheets in One Step (Two-page Separation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27 Scanning Originals for Use as a Booklet (Booklet Scanning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28 Erasing Shadows and Frame Lines (Frame Erase) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31 Reducing Two, Four or Eight Originals to Fit on a Single Print Sheet and Storing it (Image Combination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39 Scanning Different-size Originals Together in the Feeder (Different Size Originals) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43 Scanning Originals Separately Set as One Document (Job Build) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45 Inverting Original Images (Nega/Posi). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47 Scanning Originals after Making them Sharply Contrasted (Sharpness) . . . . . . . . . 4-49 Storing/ Recalling Scanning Modes (Mode Memory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51 Printing a Document Stored, in a Box after Changing the Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting the Print Paper Size (Paper Select) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Collating Prints (Finisher) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Two-sided Printing (Two-sided Printing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Job Separator Sheets, Front and Back Covers to Printed Sets (Cover/Job Separator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Making Prints for Use as a Booklet (Booklet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing Multiple Documents as One Document (Merge Documents) . . . . . . . . . . . . Storing/ Recalling Often Used Print Setting in Memory (Mode Memory) . . . . . . . . . 4-61 4-61 4-63 4-67 4-69 4-72 4-75 4-77
4-1
4. Using the Mail Box Functions

Checking the Print Result or the Image of the Stored Document (Sample Print) . . . . . .4-88 Checking the Documents Detailed Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-90 Changing the Name of a Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-91 Moving a Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-93 Erasing a Document from a Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-95
4
4-2
Flow of Mail Box Operations

This section describes the ow of basic Mail Box operations dividing it in two parts; Scanning originals and Printing. NOTE
For details on the following items, see the indicated pages. - Main Power and Control Panel Power (See p. 1-6.) - Loading Paper and Adding Toner (See Chapter 7.) - Routine Cleaning (See p. 8-25.)
Storing Originals in the Box

The operation is the same as when making copies. First, place the originals you want to store in the feeder or on the platen glass, then set the desired modes. When the machine is used as a network printer, you can store data into the box from a computer.
Press the
MAIL BOX
key.
COPY
MAIL BOX
SCAN
Select the desired box number. NOTE

When the desired box is not displayed, press the [ ] or [ ] key. When you enter the box number using the Numeric keys ( 0 - 9 ), press the [OK] key after entering the box number. If a box is set with a password, a locked mark [ ] is displayed next to that box icon. If a document is stored in a box, that box is displayed with the [ ] icon.
4-3
Enter the password, then press the [OK] key. NOTE

Enter the password used when the box was stored. (See Setting/ Storing the Box, on p. 6-46.) If a password has not been stored, this operation is not necessary.
4
Press the [Scan] key.
Place your originals. (See Placing Originals, on p. 1-11.)
Specify the scanning mode. NOTE

You can set various modes when scanning the original as when making copies. When storing by designating the document name when scanning, press the [Document Name] key. (See Giving a Name to the Document to be Scanned (Document Name), on p. 4-9.)
4-4
Start
Press the
key.
3
Start Stop
When scanning is completed, the display returns to the screen in step 4. IMPORTANT
You cannot change the settings such as the scanning quantity and scanning paper size during scanning.
6 9
Clear
NOTE
When you want to stop scanning, press the [Cancel] key or the key.
Stop
When the screen on the right appears: Press the key once for each original. When scanning is completed, press the [Done] key.
Start
NOTE
You can change the setting of the Two-sided/ One-sided modes, Image Quality and Scanning Exposure.
When scanning is completed, the scanned data is stored in the selected box. NOTE
The stored document without designating the name of document is automatically stored with the name of year, month, date and time". For example, when the data was scanned at 1:35 (PM), 41 seconds, on August 12, 2000, its name is 20000812133541. You can also change the name of the stored data. (See Changing the Name of a Document, on p. 4-91.) The stored data is deleted after 3 days. This can be changed between no limit and 30 days. (See Setting/ Storing the Box, on p. 6-46.)
4-5
Printing Documents Stored in the Box

You can print documents stored in a box from this machine. When the machine is used as a network printer, you can also specify printing from the computer. For details on how to operate the machine from personal computers, see the Remote UI Guide. NOTE
You can select and print up to 32 documents in one box at a time. When you merge documents, you can select and print up to 100 documents. However, when there are reserved jobs in the box, the number you can select and print varies depending on the number of documents in the reserved jobs. You can only select multiple documents when those documents are stored in the same box. To print multiple documents stored in different boxes, you need to move the documents to one of the boxes beforehand. (See Moving a Document, on p. 4-93.) When documents are printed without changing the settings, the documents sent from computers are printed with the settings set from the computers, and the documents scanned into memory are printed with the standard Local Print settings. (See Setting a Standard Mode for Local Printing, on p. 6-21.)
Press the
MAIL BOX
key.
COPY
MAIL BOX
SCAN
Press the desired box number. NOTE

When the desired box is not displayed, press the [ ] or [ ] key. When entering the box number using the Numeric keys ( 0 - 9 ), press the [OK] key after entering the box number. If a box is set with a password, a locked mark [ ] is displayed next to that box icon. If a document is stored in a box, that box is displayed with the [ ] icon.
4-6
Enter the password, then press the [OK] key. NOTE

Enter the password used when the box was stored. (See Setting/ Storing the Box, on p. 6-46.) If a password has not been stored, this operation is not necessary.
Select the document you want to print. NOTE

When there are more than 4 stored documents, press the [ ] or [ ] key to display the other documents. You can select multiple documents stored in the box. The selected documents are numbered in the order specied, and are printed in the order numbered. When you press the [Select All] key, you can select all documents in the box (The key changes to the [Clear Selection] key). You can cancel the selection by pressing the document again. When you press the [Clear Selection] key, you can cancel all selection of the documents (The key changes to the [Select All] key).
Press the [Print] key.
4-7
Press the [Start Print] key. If there is a current job or a previously reserved job, the machine will start printing after that job is completed. NOTE
You can enter the printing quantity using the Numeric keys ( 0 - 9 ). If you make a mistake entering the quantity, press the C key and enter the correct quantity. When you press the [Sample Print] key, one print is made for you to conrm the printing output or the settings and the image data of the stored document. (See Checking the Print Result or the Image of the Stored Document (Sample Print), on p. 4-88.) When you press the [Change P Settings] key, you can change each print setting. (See Printing a Document Stored, in a Box after Changing the Settings, on p. 4-61.) When you press the [Print & Erase] key, you can delete the printed data. When you select multiple documents and press the [Change The Copies] key, you can change the number of prints. You can change the exposure or cancel the printing during printing.(See Chapter 5 Printing Efciently.)
Clear
When you select one document.
When you select multiple documents.
When printing starts, the screen on the right appears. NOTE

To cancel printing, press the [Cancel] key. (You cannot cancel printing by pressing the key.) To reserve the next print, press the [Done] key and begin by selecting the box in which the desired document is stored. (See Reserving a Box Print while Printing (Reserve Print), on p. 5-9.)
Stop
When printing is completed, the display returns to the Box selection screen.
4-8
Scanning Originals into a Box

Giving a Name to the Document to be Scanned (Document Name)
You can give a name to the document before scanning.
Prepare to scan the original into the box following the procedure below.
MAIL BOX
Select the desired box number NOTE
Place the original
When you select a box set with a password, enter the password after selecting the box.
Press the [Document Name] key.

Document Size Select
NOTE
For details on how to enter the characters, see Entering Characters on the Touch Panel Display, on p. 10-6. The maximum number of characters you can assign for a name is 24.
4-9
Enter the name, and press the [OK] key.
Start scanning the original. (See Storing Originals in the Box, on p. 4-3.) NOTE
To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings] key. (The machine returns to the Standard Scanning mode.) When you press the key, the display returns to Box selection screen.
Reset
Specifying Document Size (Doc. Size Select)

You can select the document size when scanning transparencies, or when specifying the document size before scanning. NOTE
The default setting is Auto.
MAIL BOX
Place the original
Press the [Doc. Size Select] key.

Document Size Select
4
4-10
Select the document size, and press the [Done] key. IMPORTANT
In the Automatic Document Size Selection mode, combined use with the Booklet Scanning, Original Frame Erase, Book Frame Erase, and Image Combination modes cannot be set. You cannot select the [Auto] key when scanning the following type of originals. Specify the size of the document manually. - Non-standard size originals - Highly transparent originals such as transparencies - Originals with an extremely dark background - Originals smaller than STMT in size
NOTE Using the Mail Box Functions

To select A or B series paper size, press the [A/B-size] key.
To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings] key. (The machine returns to the Standard Scanning mode.) When you press the key, the display returns to Box selection screen.
Reset
Adjusting the Exposure and Image Quality before Scanning the Originals (Scanning Exposure)
Manual Adjustment of the Scanning Exposure
You can manually adjust the scanning exposure to the most appropriate level for the original.
MAIL BOX
Place the original
4-11
Press the [Light] or [Dark] key. NOTE

Light Dark
3
To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings] key. (The machine returns to the Standard Scanning mode.) When you press the key, the display returns to the Box selection screen.
Reset
Selecting Image Quality

You can adjust image quality to the level best suited to the quality of text or photo originals. The following three modes are available for adjusting image quality. Text mode This mode is best suited for scanning text originals. Blue prints or penciled originals can be scanned clearly. Text/Photo mode This mode is best suited for scanning originals containing both text and photos. Photo mode This mode is best suited for scanning photos printed on photographic paper, or photo originals containing half-tones (i.e. printed photos). IMPORTANT
If you scan an original containing half-tones such as a printed photograph using the Photo mode, moir may occur. If this happens, you can soften this mori effect by using the Sharpness mode. (See Scanning Originals after Making them Sharply Contrasted (Sharpness), on p. 4-49.) Combinations of these three modes cannot be set. If you select one of these modes, the previously set mode is canceled.
NOTE
When you have selected the Text, Text/Photo or Photo mode, the scanning exposure can be adjusted only by Manual Exposure Control. Automatic Exposure Control cannot be set. When the Photo Mode of Mail Box Settings is set to On, you can select printed image or photo after pressing the [ ] key. (See Setting the Photo Mode of the Mail Box Function, on p. 6-51.) If the original is a transparency, select the Text, Text/Photo or Photo mode and adjust the exposure to the most appropriate level.
4-12
MAIL BOX
Place the original
Press the [
] key.
Text Text/Photo Photo Printed Img.
Select the type of your original (Text, Text/Photo, Photo).
When the Photo Mode of Mail Box Settings is set to On, you can select the [Printed Img.] or [Photo] key. (See Setting the Photo Mode of the Mail Box Function, on p. 6-51.)
4-13
Press the [Light] or [Dark] key to adjust the scanning exposure. NOTE
5
To cancel the setting, press the [A] key. To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings] key. (The machine returns to the Standard Scanning mode.) When you press the key, the display returns to the Box selection screen.
Reset
Automatic Adjustment of Exposure and Image Quality
MAIL BOX
Select the desired box number
Place the original
NOTE
Press the [A] key. The scanning exposure is automatically adjusted to the level best suited to the quality of the original. NOTE
If the original is a transparency, you may not be able to use Automatic Exposure Control. If so, adjust the scanning exposure using Manual Exposure Control.
4-14
To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings] key. (The machine returns to the Standard Scanning mode.) When you press the key, the display returns to the Box selection screen.
Reset
Changing the Scanning Ratio (Copy Ratio)

Scanning Originals after Enlarging/ Reducing them to a Standard Record Size (Preset Zoom)
You can scan the originals after enlarging/reducing them to a standard record size. Using the Mail Box Functions 4-15
1
Auto
MAIL BOX
Preset Zoom
Place the original

Copy Ratio
To reduce, select a reduction ratio. To enlarge, select an enlargement ratio.
5
To return the scanning ratio to 100%, press the [Direct] key. To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings] key. (The machine returns to the Standard Scanning mode.) When you press the key, the display returns to the Box selection screen.
Reset
Specifying the Scanning Ratio by % (Zoom Designation)

You can reduce or enlarge images by any scanning ratio, in 1% increments. The available scanning ratios are from 25% to 400% when the original is placed on the platen glass, and from 25% to 200% when the original is placed in the feeder.
MAIL BOX
Place the original
Zoom Designation
4-16
Enter the ratio using the Numeric keys ( 0 - 9 ) or the [] and [+] keys. NOTE
Even if you entered the ratio with the Numeric keys ( 0 - 9 ), you can change the entered values with the [] and [+] keys. If you make a mistake when entering values, press the C key, and enter the correct value.
Clear

If you enter a value outside the setting range, a message prompting you to enter the appropriate value will appear on the screen.
To return the scanning ratio to 100%, press the [Direct] key. To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings] key. (The machine returns to the Standard Scanning mode.) When you press the key, the display returns to the Box selection screen.
Reset
4-17
Automatically Setting the Ratio Based on the Selected Record Size (Auto)
In this mode, the machine automatically selects the appropriate scanning ratio based on the selected record size. The available scanning ratios are from 25% to 400% when the original is placed on the platen glass, and from 25% to 200% when the original is placed in the feeder. IMPORTANT
You cannot scan highly transparent originals, such as transparencies, in the Auto mode. Use the Preset Zoom or Zoom Designation mode. To use the Auto mode, your originals must conform to a standard paper size.
NOTE
If an error occurs between the Auto scanning ratio and the actual scanning size, you can adjust this with the Zoom Fine Adjustment function. (See Fine-adjusting Zoom When Differences in Original Image and Print Image Occur, on p. 6-31.) The record sizes that can be used with Auto are 11"x17"/ LGL/ LTR/ LTRR/ STMT/ STMTR. However, when scanning STMT-size original using the platen glass, you need to set the LTRR/STMT Original Selection in the Additional Functions. (See Distinguishing LTRR-Size and STMT-Size Originals, on p. 6-16.)
MAIL BOX
Place the original
Press the [Auto] key.
4-18
Select the record size, and press the [OK] key. NOTE
Start scanning the original. (See Storing Originals in the Box, on p. 4-3.) NOTE Using the Mail Box Functions
To return the ratio to 100%, press the [Direct] key. To cancel the setting, press the [Copy Ratio], [Auto], and [Cancel] keys in that order. To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings] key. (The machine returns to the Standard Scanning mode.) When you press the key, the display returns the to the Box selection screen. If the original was placed on the platen glass, the zoom ratio appears when the feeder is lowered, provided that the original size can be detected. If the original was placed in the feeder, the zoom ratio appears when the key is pressed. The zoom ratio can be set within the range of 25% to 400%.
Reset Start
Calculating the Scanning Ratio Based on the Original and Record Size (Zoom Program)
If you enter measurements for the original and desired scan images (or sheets), the machine will automatically calculate and set the appropriate scanning ratio. The following two Zoom Program modes are available. The available scanning ratios are from 25% to 400% when the original is placed on the platen glass, and from 25% to 200% when the original is placed in the feeder. Scanning with the same XY scanning ratio (Zoom) Designate the same scanning ratio for the vertical and horizontal directions. Scanning with different XY scanning ratios (XY Zoom) Designate different scanning ratios for the vertical and horizontal directions. NOTE
The designated sizes are converted to the scanning ratio (%) as follows: - scanning ratio (%) = (scanning size original size) 100
4-19
Scanning with the same XY scanning ratio (Zoom)
MAIL BOX
Place the original

Zoom Program Zoom
4-20
Press the [Original Size] key and enter the original size, then press the [Record Size] key and enter the size to be recorded. Then press the [OK] key. NOTE
When entering values in millimeters, you can use the Numeric keys ( 0 - 9 ) and the C key on the control panel. If you make a mistake when entering values, press the [C] key in the touch panel, and enter the values again. If you want to enter values in millimeters, press the [mm] key. For details on how to enter values in inches, see Setting in Inches, on p. 10-8. To designate the sizes of the horizontal direction (X) and the vertical direction (Y) independently, press the [XY Zoom] key. If the zoom ratio is less than 25%, a message telling you that the ratio will be adjusted to 25% will appear. If it is more than 400%, a message telling you that the ratio will be adjusted to 400% will appear.
Clear
XY Zoom
Place the original on the platen glass if the zoom ratio is more than 200%. To return the scanning ratio to 100%, press the [Direct] key. To cancel the setting, press the [Zoom], [Other Zoom], [Zoom Program], and [Cancel] keys in that order. To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings] key. (The machine returns to the Standard Scanning mode.) When you press the key, the display returns to the Box selection screen.
Reset
Scanning with different XY scanning ratios (XY Zoom)
MAIL BOX
Place the original
4-21
3
4-22
Press the [X] (horizontal direction) key and [Y] (vertical direction) keys for both the original size and record size, and enter the values for X and Y with the Numeric keys. NOTE
When entering values in millimeters, you can use the Numeric keys ( 0 - 9 ) and the C key on the control panel. If you make a mistake when entering values, press the [C] key in the touch panel, and enter the correct values. If you want to enter values in millimeters, press the [mm] key. For details on how to enter values in inches, see Setting in Inches, on p. 10-8. To set the same values for the X and Y axes, press the [Zoom] key. If the zoom ratio is less than 25%, a message telling you that the ratio will be adjusted to 25% will appear. If it is more than 400%, a message telling you that the ratio will be adjusted to 400% will appear.
Clear
7
Two-sided Originals
Enter all values, and press the [OK] key.
Start scanning the original (See Storing Originals in the Box, on p. 4-3.) NOTE
Place the original on the platen glass if the zoom ratio is more than 200%. To return the scanning ratio to 100%, press the [Direct] key. To cancel the setting, press the [Copy Ratio], [Other Zoom], [Zoom Program], and [Cancel] keys in that order. To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings] key. (The machine returns to the Standard Scanning mode.) When you press the key, the display returns to the Box selection screen.
Reset
4-23
Enlarging/Reducing Originals at Scanning Ratios Set Independently for X and Y Axes (XY Zoom)
If you set the XY Zoom mode, you can scan an original enlarging or reducing it to different XY scanning ratios. The available scanning ratios are from 25% to 400% when the original is placed on the platen glass, and from 25% to 200% when the original is placed in the feeder. IMPORTANT
You cannot scan highly transparent originals, such as transparencies, in the XY Zoom mode. Specify the scanning ratio.
NOTE
If an error occurs between the XY Zoom scanning and the actual scanning size, you can adjust this with the Zoom Fine Adjustment function. (See Fine-adjusting Zoom When Differences in Original Image and Print Image Occur, on p. 6-31.)
1
MAIL BOX
Place the original
4-24
Press the [X] and [Y] keys and enter each values for X and Y. Then press the [OK] key. NOTE Using the Mail Box Functions Scanning Originals into a Box 4-25
You can enter the numbers using the Numeric keys ( 0 - 9 ) on the control panel. If you make a mistake when entering values, press the [C] key in the touch panel, and enter the correct values. Even if you entered the ratio with the Numeric keys ( 0 - 9 ), you can change the entered values with the [] and [+] keys. If you enter a value outside the setting range, a message prompting you to enter the appropriate value will appear on the screen.
(See Storing Originals in the Box, on p. 4-3.) NOTE

To return the scanning ratio to 100%, press the [Direct] key. To cancel the setting, press the [Copy Ratio], [Other Zoom], [XY Zoom], and [Cancel] keys in that order. To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings] key. (The machine returns to the Standard Scanning mode.) When you press the key, the display returns to the Box selection screen.
Reset
Scanning Two-sided Originals (Two-sided Original)

This feature automatically turns over two-sided originals placed in the feeder to scan each side separately. IMPORTANT
In the Two-sided Original mode, combined use with the Two-page Separation, Booklet Scanning, and Image Combination modes cannot be set. Place the original horizontally when scanning originals such as LTRR/ STMTR size. If these originals are placed vertically, the back side of the print will be printed upside down.
Start scanning the original.
MAIL BOX
Place the original
Press the [2-sided Original] key.
Select the type of original, and press the [OK] key.
When the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on the display and press the key once for each original. When scanning is completed, press the [Done] key. To cancel the setting, press the [2-sided Original] and [Cancel] keys in that order. To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings] key. (The machine returns to the Standard Scanning mode.) When you press the key, the display returns to the Box selection screen.
Start Reset
4-26
Scanning Facing Pages in a Book onto Two Separate Sheets in One Step (Two-page Separation)
This feature enables you to scan facing pages in a book or a magazine on separate sheets of paper. IMPORTANT
In the Two-page Separation mode, combined use with the Two-sided Original, Booklet Scanning, Different Size Originals, Binding Erase, and Image Combination modes cannot be set. Place your originals on the platen glass. You cannot scan originals placed in the feeder using the Two-page Separation mode.
MAIL BOX
Place the original

Two-page Separation
Press the [Two-page Separation] key.
4-27
When you select a box set with a password, enter the password after selecting the box. If you want to record in page order, begin scanning from the rst page and work your way forward. Place the original face down so that the originals top edge is against the back edge of the platen glass.
5
Start scanning the original. (See Storing Originals in the Box, on p. 4-3.) For the next two facing pages, place the original and press the completed, press the [Done] key. NOTE
To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features] and [Two-page Separation] keys in that order. To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings] key. (The machine returns to the Standard Scanning mode.) When you press the key, the display returns to the Box selection screen.
Reset Start
key again. When scanning is
Scanning Originals for Use as a Booklet (Booklet Scanning)

You can scan originals in such a way that, when printing the scanned data, the output papers can be easily made into a booklet. Specify the Booklet mode when printing the scanned data. (See Making Prints for Use as a Booklet (Booklet), on p. 4-72.) IMPORTANT
In the Booklet Scanning mode, combined use with the Two-page Separation, Different Size Originals, Frame Erase, and Image Combination modes cannot be set. When you place the originals used in the vertical direction horizontally and scan them, the images of the even number pages will be printed upside down. Place these originals vertically.
MAIL BOX
Place the original
4-28

Booklet ning Scan-
Frame Erase
Press the [Booklet Scanning] key.
Select the original size, and press the [Next] key. NOTE
To scan two-sided originals, also press the [2-Sided Original] key. To select A or B series paper size, press the [A/B-size] key.
When you select the [2-Sided Original] key: Select the type of the original, and press the [OK] key.
4-29
Original Erase
Frame
Select the booklet layout size, and press the [OK] key. NOTE
The originals are recorded to match half the size of selected paper size. To select A or B series paper size, press the [A/B-size] key.
6
When the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on the display and press the key once for each original. When scanning is completed, press the [Done] key. To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [Booklet Scanning], and [Cancel] keys in that order. To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings] key. (The machine returns to the Standard Scanning mode.) When you press the key, the display returns to the Box selection screen.
Start Reset
4
4-30
Erasing Shadows and Frame Lines (Frame Erase)

This mode erases shadows and lines that appear when scanning various types of originals. The following three Frame Erase features are available. IMPORTANT
Combinations of these three modes cannot be set. If you select one of these modes, the previously set mode is canceled.
Original Frame Erase Erases the dark borders and frame lines that appear around the printed paper when the original is smaller than the selected record paper size, then records it. IMPORTANT
In the Original Frame Erase mode, combined use with the Automatic Document Size Select, Booklet Scanning, Different Size Originals, and Image Combination modes cannot be set.
IMPORTANT
In the Book Frame Erase mode, combined use with the Automatic Document Size Select, Booklet Scanning, Different Size Originals, and Image Combination modes cannot be set.
Binding Erase Erases the shadows that appear in prints from binding holes in originals, then records them. IMPORTANT
In the Binding Frame Erase mode, combined use with the Two-page Separation and Booklet Scanning modes cannot be set. Do not place originals with binding holes in the feeder, as this may damage the originals.
4-31
Book Frame Erase Erases the dark borders as well as center and contour lines that appear when printing facing pages in a bound original onto a single record paper, then records them.
Erasing Frame Lines and Storing the Original (Original Frame Erase)
MAIL BOX
Place the original
Press the [Original Frame Erase] key, and press the [Next] key.
4-32
Select the size of the original, and press the [Next] key. NOTE
You can only set the Original Frame Erase mode for original sizes shown in the touch panel display. To select A or B series paper size, press the [A/B-size] key.
Set the desired original frame erase width using the [] or [+] key, and press the [OK] key. The value set here is specied uniformly around the original. To set frame erase width value for the top, bottom, left and right sides of the original independently, press the [Adjust Each Dim.] key. NOTE
Clear
When you select the [Adjust Each Dim.] key: Select each side in turn and set the frame erase width using the [] or [+] key, and press the [OK] key.
4-33
8
To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [Frame Erase], and [Cancel] keys in that order. To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings] key. (The machine returns to the Standard Scanning mode.) When you press the key, the display returns to the Box selection screen.
Reset
Erasing the Book Frame and Storing the Original (Book Frame Erase)
MAIL BOX
Place the original
Book Frame Erase
4-34
Binding Erase
Press the [Book Frame Erase] key, and press the [Next] key.
Select the size of the book when opened, and press the [Next] key. NOTE
4-35
Press each key (Top, Left, Center, Right, and Bottom) and set the desired book frame erase width using the [] or [+] key, and press the [OK] key. The values set here are specied independently around the original. To set a value uniformly around the original, press the [Adjust All At Once] key. NOTE
When entering values in millimeters, you can use the Numeric keys ( 0 - 9 ) and the C key on the control panel. If you enter a value outside the setting range, a message prompting you to enter the appropriate value will appear on the screen. Even when you enter the values with the Numeric keys ( 0 - 9 ), you can change the values using the [] or [+] key. If you want to enter values in millimeters, press the [mm] key. The default settings are 3/8" (10 mm) for Center and 1/8" (4 mm) for Top, Left, Right and Bottom.
Clear
When you select the [Adjust All At Once] key: Press the [Sides] and [Center] key to set the desired frame erase width using the [] or [+] key, and press the [OK] key.
4-36
Reset
Erasing the Shadows of Binding Holes and Storing the Original (Binding Erase)
MAIL BOX
Place the original Using the Mail Box Functions 4-37
When you select a box set with a password, enter the password after selecting the box. Place the original on the platen glass.
2
Image Combination
Press the [Binding Erase] key, and press the [Next] key.
5
Specify the binding erase feature, and press the [Next] key. NOTE
The position of the binding holes does not refer to the position in which the original is placed on the platen glass, but to the position of the binding holes viewed when the surface of the original that you want to scan is face up, with the top edge at the top.
Set the desired binding erase width using the [] or [+] key, and press the [OK] key. NOTE
Clear
4
4-38
Start scanning the original. (See Storing Originals in the Box, on p. 4-3.) NOTE Using the Mail Box Functions
Reset
Reducing Two, Four or Eight Originals to Fit on a Single Print Sheet and Storing it (Image Combination)
This mode automatically reduces two, four, or eight originals and records them to t on one side or both sides of a selected record size. IMPORTANT
In the Image Combination mode, combined use with the Automatic Document Size Select, Two-page Separation, Booklet Scanning, Different Size Originals, Original Frame Erase, and Book Frame Erase modes cannot be set. Originals printed in the Image Combination mode must all be the same size. You cannot use the Image Combination mode in combination with the Different Size Originals mode.
NOTE
The reduction ratio is automatically set so that the originals t on the selected record size.
2 On 1 Reduces two 1-sided or one 2-sided originals to t on one side or both sides of the print sheet and records them. 4 On 1 Reduces four 1-sided or two 2-sided originals to t on one side or both sides of the print sheet and records them. 8 On 1 Reduces eight 1-sided or four 2-sided originals to t on one side or both sides of the print sheet and records them.
4-39
MAIL BOX
Place the original
Press the [Image Combination] key.
Select the size of the originals, and press the [Next] key. NOTE
When reducing a two-sided original, press the [2-Sided Original] key after selecting the original size. To select A or B series paper size, press the [A/B-size] key.
4-40
When you select the [2-Sided Original] key: Select the type of original, and press the [OK] key.
Select the desired Image Combination feature, and press the [Next] key.
When you select the [Option] key: Select the image order, and press the [Done] key.
2 On 1
4 On 1, 8 On 1
4-41
Select the record size, and press the [OK] key. NOTE
The document is scanned with the reduction ratio automatically set depending on the selected record size. To select A or B series paper size, press the [A/B-size] key.
7
When the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on the display and press the key once for each original. When scanning is completed, press the [Done] key. To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [Image Combination], and [Cancel] keys in that order. To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings] key. (The machine returns to the Standard Scanning mode.) When you press the key, the display returns to the Box selection screen.
Start Reset
4
4-42
Scanning Different-size Originals Together in the Feeder (Different Size Originals)

This function enables you to scan different-size originals with the same width, or different-size originals with different widths, together in one group. IMPORTANT
In the Different Size Originals mode, combined use with the Manual Document Size Select, Two-page Separation, Booklet Scanning, Original Frame Erase, Book Frame Erase, and Image Combination modes cannot be set. All originals placed together in the feeder must be the same weight (paper type). Align the top edge of the originals with the back edge of the feeder when placing different-width originals. Set the different-size originals with different width with the combinations as follows. Other combinations may damage the originals. - 11"x17" and LGL, LTR and LGL, LTR and LTRR. When you place different-width originals, the originals may slightly be moved when fed to the platen glass, and as a result, the images may be scanned slantwise.
MAIL BOX
Place the original

Different Size Originals
Press the [Different Size Originals] key.
4-43
Select the type of the Different Size Originals, and press the [OK] key. NOTE
When you set the same-width originals, press the [Same Width] key. When you set the different-width originals, press the [Different Width] key.
5
Press the [Done] key
When the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on the display and press the key once for each original. When scanning is completed, press the [Done] key. To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [Different Size Originals], and [Cancel] keys in that order. To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings] key. (The machine returns to the Standard Scanning mode.) When you press the key, the display returns to the Box selection screen.
Start Reset
4
4-44
Scanning Originals Separately Set as One Document (Job Build)

This mode enables you to scan originals that are too many to set at once, by dividing them into multiple batches. You can use both the feeder and the platen glass for scanning. The originals are stored as one document after all the batches have been scanned. IMPORTANT
You cannot change the scan settings while scanning originals in the Job Build mode. You need to set the necessary settings beforehand according to the type of original and desired Finisher mode. If you place the original in the feeder, remove the original sequentially from the original output area when scanning is completed. When you place different-size originals in the feeder, set the Different size Originals mode.
NOTE
When you want to scan one-sided and two-sided originals as two-sided, set the Two-sided Original mode beforehand if the rst batch of originals is two-sided. To scan next original(s), set or cancel the Two-sided Original mode according to the type of original. It is useful to store originals in a box and print them with the Merge Documents mode when you cannot prepare originals at once, or when you want to set different settings for each original. (See Printing Multiple Documents as One Document (Merge Documents), on p. 4-75.)
MAIL BOX
Place the original
Job build
4-45
Press the [Job Build] key.
4
Start
Press the nals. NOTE
key to start scanning the origi3

Start Stop
You can adjust the Exposure and the Image Quality. (See Adjusting the Exposure and Image Quality before Scanning the Originals (Scanning Exposure), on p. 4-11.) You can change the setting of the original type (One-sided/Two-sided). (See Scanning Two-sided Originals (Two-sided Original), on p. 4-25.) To cancel scanning, press the [Cancel] key or the key.
Stop
6 9
Clear
When scanning Two-sided originals: Press the [2-sided Original] key. IMPORTANT
Do not forget to set or cancel the Two-sided Original mode according to the type of original.
4-46
Select the type of two-sided original, and press the [OK] key.
When scanning is completed, set the next original.
Repeat steps 5 and 6 until the last original is scanned, then press the [Done] key. NOTE
To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features] and [Job Build] keys in that order. To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings] key. (The machine returns to the Standard Scanning mode.) When you press the key, the display returns to the Box selection screen.
Reset

This function enables you to record the original inverting the black and the white areas.
MAIL BOX
Nega/Posi
Place the original
4-47
3
Press the [Nega/Posi] key.
To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features] and [Nega/Posi] keys in that order. To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings] key. (The machine returns to the Standard Scanning mode.) When you press the key, the display returns to the Box selection screen.
Reset
4-48
Scanning Originals after Making them Sharply Contrasted (Sharpness)

This mode allows you to scan original images with the contrast reproduced sharper or softer. To scan originals with text or lines reproduced sharper, use the [High] key. To scan originals with photographs or other half-tones reproduced softer, use the [Low] key. Low If you want to scan an original containing half-tones such as a printed photograph using the Photo mode, moir or screen clash may occur. However, by using the [Low] key, you can soften this moir effect so that the print is easier on the eyes. High This feature enhances the edges of original images so that faint or ne text is reproduced more sharply. This is particularly suited to blueprints or faint pencil-drawn originals.
MAIL BOX
NOTE
Sharpness
Press the [Sharpness] key.
4-49
Place the original
Use the [High] or [Low] key to adjust the sharpness, and press the [OK] key. NOTE
To scan text and lines clearly, the setting should be towards High. To scan photographs etc., the setting should be towards Low.
5
To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [Sharpness], and [Cancel] keys in that order. To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings] key. (The machine returns to the Standard Scanning mode.) When you press the key, the display returns to the Box selection screen.
Reset
4
4-50
Storing/ Recalling Scanning Modes (Mode Memory)

You can store any possible combination of the Scanning functions, up to nine settings, in a memory key, and name that key. It is useful when you want to store the settings used frequently. NOTE
The scanning modes in memory will not be erased even if you turn the power OFF. The scanning modes you can store in memory key is Document Size Select, Scanning Exposure, Image Quality, Copy Ratio, 2-sided Original, Document Name, Two-page Separation, Booklet Scanning, Different Size Originals, Job Build, Nega/Posi, Sharpness, Frame Erase, and Image Combination.
Storing Scanning Modes
Call up the Scanning screen as follows:

MAIL BOX
Nega/Posi
Program the scan settings that you want to store in the Scanning screen or Special Features screen. NOTE
In the display on the right, the Nega/Posi and Job Build modes are set.
Mode Memory
4-51
5
Select the desired memory key from among memory keys [M1] to [M9], and press the [Next] key. NOTE
The mode memory key where scan settings are already stored shows a small, black square [] in the lower right corner of the key. If you selected a memory key to which a scanning mode has already been stored, its settings are displayed. If there are more stored scanning modes than currently displayed, you can scroll the list using the [] or [] keys.
If you selected a memory key in which a scanning mode has not yet been stored: The message to conrm whether or not you want to store the new scanning job is displayed. To store: Select the [Yes] key. The new scanning setting is stored into the memory key. To cancel storing: Select the [No] key, then select another key.
4-52
If you selected a memory key in which a scanning mode has already been stored: The message to conrm that you want to replace the old scanning setting with the new scanning settings is displayed. To overwrite: Select the [Yes] key. The contents of the memory key are replaced with the new scanning setting. To cancel storing: Select the [No] key, then select another memory key. When storing is completed, the message Stored in memory. appears for about two seconds.
When the scan settings are stored, the memory key storing the scanning mode is highlighted and the stored settings are displayed. Using the Mail Box Functions Scanning Originals into a Box 4-53
Press the [Done] key. The display returns to the Scanning screen.

MAIL BOX
Nega/Posi
4-54
The mode memory key where scan settings are already stored shows a small, black square [] in the lower right corner of the key. If you selected a memory key to which a scanning mode has already been stored, its settings are displayed.
4-55
Recalling a Scanning Mode
1

MAIL BOX
Nega/Posi
4-56
Select the memory key where the scan setting you want to recall is stored.
Check the scan settings stored to the memory key. If the contents are correct, press the [OK] key. Using the Mail Box Functions
Nega/Posi
The display returns to the Special Features screen. NOTE

"Recalling a scanning mode from memory cancels the current scanning mode. After recalling a scanning mode from memory, you can change its settings and scan. If you press another memory key, the scanning mode stored in that key is recalled."
Erasing a Scanning Setting

MAIL BOX
4-57
3
4-58
Select the memory key of the scanning mode that you want to erase, and press the [Next] key. IMPORTANT
Check the scan settings before you erase them.
NOTE
The mode memory key where scan settings are already stored shows a small, black square [] in the lower right corner of the key. If you selected a memory key to which a scanning mode has already been stored, its settings are displayed. If there are more stored scanning modes than currently displayed, you can scroll the list using the [] or [] keys.
The message on the right appears to conrm that you want to erase the scanning mode. Select the [Yes] key. The stored scanning mode is erased. NOTE
4-59
9
4
4-60
Printing a Document Stored, in a Box after Changing the Settings

You can select the modes when printing documents stored in a box.
Selecting the Print Paper Size (Paper Select)
Specify the desired document following procedure below.

MAIL BOX
Select the desired box number, then the desired document NOTE
Press the [Change P Settings] key. Using the Mail Box Functions 4-61
Press the [Paper Select] key. NOTE

When you press the [Initial Settings] key, the document recorded from a personal computer returns to the former settings and the scanned document returns to the standard mode of the Local Printing.
Select the print paper size, and press the [Done] key.
When you select the [StackBypass Setting] key: Select the paper size, and press the [Next] key. NOTE
If there is a current job or a previously reserved job which uses the stack bypass, select the [StackBypass Setting] key and set the desired paper. To select A or B series paper size, press the [A/B-size] key.
Select the paper type, and press the [OK] key.
Press the [Start Print] key. If there is a current job or a previously reserved job, the machine will start printing after that job is completed. (See Printing Documents Stored in the Box, on p. 4-6.) NOTE
To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings] key. (The machine returns to the standard mode of the Local Printing.) When you press the key, the display returns to the Box selection screen.
Reset
4-62
Collating Prints (Finisher)

The Finisher mode can be selected to collate the prints in various ways by pages or print sets. (See Collating Copies (Finisher), on p. 2-48.)
Merge ments
Docu-

MAIL BOX
Press the [Change P Settings] key.

Finisher
Press the [Finisher] key. NOTE

4-63
Select the desired collate feature, and press the [OK] key. NOTE
When you selected the [Staple] key, press the [Next] key. The [Staple] key only appears when the Finisher (option) is attached. The [Rotate] key only appears when the Finisher (option) is not attached. The [Hole Punch] key only appears when the Puncher Unit-B1 (option) unit is attached to the Finisher. The [Offset] key only appears when the Finisher (option) is attached.
When the Finisher and the Puncher Unit-B1 are attached.
When you select the [Staple] key: Select the type of stapling( [Corner], [Double], [Saddle Stitch] ), and press the [OK] key. IMPORTANT
You cannot set the Staple mode when printing on transparencies, tracing papers, labels, and 3-hole punch. The maximum number of papers which can be stapled at a time is as follows: - 11"x17"/ LGL/ LTRR: 30 sheets - LTR : 50 sheets
When the Finisher is not attached.
When you select the [Corner] key: Select the staple position, and press the [OK] key. IMPORTANT
STMTR-size paper cannot be corner-stapled.
4
4-64
When you select the [Double] key: Select the staple position, and press the [OK] key. IMPORTANT
LGL/ LTRR/ STMTR-size paper cannot be double-stapled.
When you select the [Saddle Stitch] key: Press the [Next] key. IMPORTANT
You cannot select the [Saddle Stitch] key when the Saddle Finisher-F2 (option) is not attached. LGL/ LTR/ STMTR-size paper cannot be saddle stitched.
NOTE
You can set the [Saddle Stitch] key when you select the [Two-sided Printing] key. (See Two-sided Printing (Two-sided Printing), on p. 4-67.) You can adjust the saddle stitch position. (See Changing the Saddle Stitch Position, on p. 6-33.)
Select the paper size, and press the [OK] key.
4-65
When you select the [Rotate] key: When the Automatic Paper Selection is set, press the [Next] key. Then select the LTR or LTRR-size paper, and press the [OK] key. NOTE
Press the [OK] key after selecting the [Rotate] key in the following case: - Available paper size is selected manually. - Available paper size is loaded for both horizontal and vertical direction. - Drawer Eligibility for APS/ADS of the paper drawer loaded with available paper size is set to On.
When you select the [Hole Punch] key: Punches holes (2 or 3 holes) in the printed sheets. Using the Mail Box Functions IMPORTANT
The machine automatically selects the type of hole punch (2 or 3 holes) depending on the selected paper size. - 2 holes: LGL/ LTRR - 3 holes: 11"x17"/ LTR You cannot punch holes in STMTR-size paper. Holes cannot be punched in transparencies, tracing papers, labels, and 3-hole punch.
To cancel the setting, press the [Finisher] and [Cancel] keys in that order. To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings] key. (The machine returns to the standard mode of the Local Printing.) When you press the key, the display returns to the Box selection screen.
Reset
4
4-66
Two-sided Printing (Two-sided Printing)

IMPORTANT
In the Two-sided Printing mode, combined use with the Booklet mode cannot be set. Non-standard paper sizes cannot be used to make two-sided prints.
NOTE
Print paper used to make two-sided prints must conform to the following specications. - Paper size : 11"x17"/ LGL/ LTR/ LTRR/ STMTR - Paper weight : 17-lb bond to 110-lb index (64 g/m2 to 200 g/m2) There are some types of paper which may meet the above specications, but cannot be used to print in the Two-sided Printing mode. When printing an odd numbered document, the back of the last page is left blank. (The machines counter does not count the blank page as a print.) Two-sided printing (printing on both sides of paper) when there are different-sized originals for the front and back sides, will result in each original being printed on one side of paper that matches its size. When you want to make prints on both sides of the paper with different-sized originals, make sure to select the paper size you want to print on, before printing.

MAIL BOX
Two-sided Printing
Press the [Two-sided Printing] key. NOTE

4-67
Select the appropriate orientation, and press the [OK] key. NOTE
If you want to print the rst page of each document on the front when documents are to be merged and also the Finisher mode (except for the Group mode) is selected, press the [Non Continuous] key. If you want to print continuously without inserting any blank pages between the documents, press the [Continuous] key.
5
To cancel the setting, press the [Two-sided Printing] and [Cancel] keys in that order. To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings] key. (The machine returns to the standard mode of the Local Printing.) When you press the key, the display returns to the Box selection screen.
Reset
4
4-68
Adding Job Separator Sheets, Front and Back Covers to Printed Sets (Cover/Job Separator)
When you select multiple documents and set the Merge Documents mode, you can program the machine to automatically add front and back covers, or job separator sheets to divide each document, using a different type of paper stock from which is used for the main text. IMPORTANT
You can set this mode only when you select multiple documents and set the Merge Documents mode. (See Printing Multiple Documents as One Document (Merge Documents), on p. 4-75.) In the Cover/Job Separator mode, combined use with the Non-collate, Group, Offset Group, Memory Collating, Memory Grouping, and Booklet modes cannot be set. You cannot print on front covers, back covers, or job separator sheets. Stapling is not possible when the total number of output papers including insertion sheets exceeds 30 sheets (for 11"x17"/ LGL/ LTRR size) or 50 sheets (for LTR size).
MAIL BOX
Select the desired box number, then the desired documents NOTE
Cover/Job Separator
Press the [Merge Documents] key. NOTE

The [Merge Documents] key only appears when you select multiple documents. When you press the [Initial Settings] key, the document recorded from a personal computer returns to the former settings and the scanned document returns to the standard mode of the Local Printing.
4-69
Specify the desired documents following procedure below.
5
Press the [Cover/Job Separator] key.
Select the desired Cover/Job Separator feature, and press the [Next] key. NOTE
You cannot print on front covers, back covers, or job separator sheets. You can cancel a mode by pressing the mode key again.
Select the paper source for each insertion sheet, and press the [OK] key. NOTE
Select the same paper size for the front and back covers and the job separator sheets. The display will vary depending on the mode selected.
4-70
To cancel the setting, press the [Cover/Job Separator] and [Cancel] keys in that order. To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings] key. (The machine returns to the standard mode of the Local Printing.) When you press the key, the display returns to the Box selection screen.
Reset
4-71
Making Prints for Use as a Booklet (Booklet)

You can make prints which can easily be made into a booklet. IMPORTANT
In the Booklet mode, combined use with the Collate, Two-sided Printing, and Cover/Job Separator modes cannot be set. You cannot set the Booklet mode for a record size other than LTR/ STMT. Saddle stitching will not be performed when there is only one sheet. The sheet will only be folded.
NOTE
When you want to print document for use as a booklet, we recommend that you scan the original with the Booklet Scanning mode beforehand. (See Scanning Originals for Use as a Booklet (Booklet Scanning), on p. 4-28.)
1

MAIL BOX
Booklet
Press the [Special Features] key. NOTE

4-72
Press the [Booklet] key.
Select the paper size, and press the [Next] key. Press the [OK] key and proceed to step 6 when the Saddle Finisher-F2 (option) is not attached. Using the Mail Box Functions 4-73 IMPORTANT
The paper used for the cover page must be the same size as the other pages. The paper used for the main text must be from 17-lb to 20-lb bond (64 g/m2 to 80 g/m2). The paper used for the cover page must not be heavier than 110-lb index (200 g/m2). You cannot print on the cover pages. When you select the [Add Cover] key, you cannot set the paper used for the main text in the stack bypass.
NOTE
To add a cover page, press the [Add Cover] key. Place the paper face down for the cover page in the stack bypass. 11''x17''/ LTRR-size paper can be selected.
When you select the [Add Cover] key: Select the type of paper, and press the [Next] key. Press the [OK] key and proceed to step 6 when the Saddle Finisher-F2 (option) is not attached.
Select whether or not to saddle stitch the booklet, and press the [OK] key. IMPORTANT
The saddle stitching cannot be set when the Saddle Finisher-F2 (option) is not attached. When the number of sheets exceeds 15, the stapling will not be performed, and the sheets will be output to the output tray.
NOTE
The available number of output load on the booklet tray in the saddle stitching is as follows: - Number of sheets Number of load 1- 5 25 sets 6-10 15 sets 11-15 10 sets Saddle Stitching will not be performed when there is only one sheet. The sheet will only be folded.
To cancel the setting, press the [Booklet] and [Cancel] keys in that order. To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings] key. (The machine returns to the standard mode of the Local Printing.) When you press the key, the display returns to the Box selection screen
Reset
4-74
Printing Multiple Documents as One Document (Merge Documents)

You can print multiple documents, such as scanned documents and documents sent from a computer etc. as one document. This mode enables you to combine documents with different settings as one document, so it is useful when you want to print documents as the following: - When printing and stapling data created with different softwares, or data made by multiple people as one document. - When printing paste-up or transparency originals and data sent from a computer as one document with the Booklet mode set. IMPORTANT
You can set this mode only when you select multiple documents. When you use this function to combine the documents, the settings for each document are cleared, and prints are made with the Standard mode settings. When printing is completed, the settings of each document return to the settings set when stored. You can change the settings of the Standard mode. (See Setting a Standard Mode for Local Printing, on p. 6-21.)
Specify the desired box following procedure below.

MAIL BOX
NOTE
Specify the documents in the order to be merged, and press the [Print] key. NOTE
The selected documents are numbered in the order specied. When you press the [Select All] key, you can select all documents in the box (The key changes to the [Clear Selection] key). You can cancel the selection by pressing the document again. When you press the [Clear Selection] key, you can cancel all selection of the documents (The key changes to the [Select All] key).
4-75
4
Press the [Merge Documents] key.
When printing multiple documents as one document, name of document displayed during print will only display the rst specied document name. To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings] key. (The machine returns to the standard mode of the Local Printing.) When you press the key, the display returns to the Box selection screen.
Reset
4
4-76
Storing/ Recalling Often Used Print Setting in Memory (Mode Memory)

You can store any possible combination of the Print settings, up to nine settings, in a memory key, and name that key. It is useful when you want to store the settings used frequently. NOTE
The printing modes in memory will not be erased even if you turn the power OFF. The printing modes you can store in memory key is The number of printouts, Two-sided Print, Finisher, Booklet, Cover/Job Separator, Sample Print, Merge Documents, and Delete After Printing.
Storing Print Settings

MAIL BOX
Select the desired box number, then the desired document NOTE Using the Mail Box Functions 4-77
Mode Memory
Program the print settings that you want to store in the Change Print Setting screen or Special Features screen. NOTE
In the display on the right, the Finisher and Two-sided Printing modes are set.
5
4-78
Select the desired memory key from among memory keys [M1] to [M9], and press the [Next] key. NOTE
The mode memory key where print settings are already stored shows a small, black square [] in the lower right corner of the key. If you selected a memory key to which a print mode has already been stored, its settings are displayed. If there are more stored printing modes than currently displayed, you can scroll the list using the [] or [] keys.
If you selected a memory key in which a print mode has not yet been stored: The message to conrm whether or not you want to store the new print setting is displayed. To store: Select the [Yes] key. The new print setting is stored into the memory key. To cancel storing: Select the [No] key, then select another key. If you selected a memory key in which a print mode has already been stored: The message to conrm that you want to replace the old print setting with the new print setting is displayed. To overwrite: Select the [Yes] key. The contents of the memory key are replaced with the new print setting. To cancel storing: Select the [No] key, then select another memory key. When storing is completed, the message Stored in memory. appears for about two seconds. Using the Mail Box Functions 4-79
When the print settings are stored, the memory key storing the print mode is highlighted and the stored settings are displayed.
10 Press the [OK] key.

The display returns to the Special Features screen.
11 Press the [Done] key.

The display returns to the Print Settings screen. Using the Mail Box Functions

MAIL BOX
4-80
4-81
The mode memory key where print settings are already stored shows a small, black square [] in the lower right corner of the key. If you selected a memory key to which a print mode has already been stored, its settings are displayed.

The display returns to the Print Settings screen.
4-82
Recalling a Printing Mode

MAIL BOX
4-83
Select the memory key where the print setting you want to recall is stored.
6
Check the print settings stored to the memory key. If the contents are correct, press the [OK] key. The display returns to the Special Features screen. NOTE
Recalling a print mode from memory cancels the current print mode. After recalling a print mode from memory, you can change its settings and make print. If you press another memory key, the print mode stored in that key is recalled.
Press the [Done] key. The display returns to the Print Settings screen.
4
4-84
Erasing a Printing Mode

MAIL BOX
4-85
6
Select the memory key of the print mode that you want to erase, and press the [Next] key. IMPORTANT
Check the print settings before you erase them.
NOTE
The mode memory key where print settings are already stored shows a small, black square [] in the lower right corner of the key. If you selected a memory key to which a printing job has already been stored, its settings are displayed. If there are more stored print modes than currently displayed, you can scroll the list using the [] or [] keys.
4-86
The message on the right appears to conrm that you want to erase the print mode. Select the [Yes] key. The stored print mode is erased. NOTE

The display returns to the Print Settings screen.
4-87
Checking the Print Result or the Image of the Stored Document (Sample Print)
You can print one set of print output when you want to check the image before printing, or when you want to check the settings and the image data of the document stored in the box. IMPORTANT
The [Sample Print] key only appears when you set the Collate or Staple mode. This key does not appear when the Group mode is set. In addition, when you select multiple documents, this key does not appear unless you set the Merge Documents mode.
NOTE
You can make a sample print even when the number of print sets is one.
1

MAIL BOX
Press the [Sample Print] key, and press the [Start Print] key. Sample set printing starts and one print set is made. NOTE
The number of print is not changed even when the sample set is made.
Sample Print
Check the printed paper, and press the [Start Print], [Cancel] or [Change Settings] key. NOTE
To output the prints, press the [Start Print] key. To cancel the printing, press the [Cancel] key. To change the settings, press the [Change Settings] key.
4-88
When you select the [Change Settings] key: Change the desired settings, then press the [Done] key. NOTE
When you made a sample print without changing the settings, press the [Change P Settings] key, then change the settings. To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings] key. (The machine returns to the standard mode of the Local Printing.)
When selecting one document and printing without changing the settings
When selecting one document and printing after changing the settings
When selecting multiple documents and printing after changing the settings
When you want to check the changed settings, press the [Sample Print] key again.
4-89
Checking the Documents Detailed Information

You can check the detailed information of documents stored in the box.

MAIL BOX
Select the desired document
When you select a box set with a password, enter the password after selecting the box. When you select multiple documents and press the [Details] key, only the details of the selected (highlighted) document are displayed.
2
Press the [Details] key.
Check the detailed information, and press the [Done] key. Repeat this until the Box selection screen appears again.
4
4-90
Checking the Documents Detailed Information
Changing the Name of a Document

You can change the name of a document stored in the box.

MAIL BOX
When you select a box set with a password, enter the password after selecting the box. When you select multiple documents and press the [Details] key, only the details of the selected (highlighted) document are displayed.
Press the [Details] key.
Press the [Change document name] key.
Enter the document name that you want to change, and press the [OK] key. NOTE
For details on how to enter the characters, see Entering Characters on the Touch Panel Display, on p. 10-6. The maximum number of characters you can assign for a name is 24. You cannot store a document without a name. If you want to cancel storing, press the [Cancel] key.
4-91
Press the [Done] key. Repeat this until the Box selection screen appears again.
4
4-92
Moving a Document
You can move a desired document to a different box.

MAIL BOX
When you select a box set with a password, enter the password after selecting the box. If you press the [Select All] key, you can select all documents in a box (The key changes to the [Clear Selection] key).
Press the [Move Document] key.
Specify the box to which you want to move the document. NOTE
You cannot move a document to multiple boxes.
Moving a Document
4-93
Press the [Start] key. The screen on the right appears. NOTE
If a document cannot be moved to the desired box, a message telling you that you cannot move the document will be displayed. If a document cannot be moved, it will remain in the original box. If an error occurs while moving multiple documents, the number of documents which have been moved is displayed.
5
Press the [Done] key. The display returns to the Box selection screen.
4
4-94
Moving a Document
Erasing a Document from a Box

You can erase a document stored in a box.

MAIL BOX
When you select a box set with a password, enter the password after selecting the box. If you press the [Select All] key, you can select all documents in a box (The key changes to the [Clear Selection] key).
Check the document, and press the [Yes] key. NOTE

If you do not want to erase the document, press the [No] key.
Press the [Done] key. The display returns to the Box selection screen.
Erasing a Document from a Box
4-95
Printing Efciently
This chapter describes operations to make print jobs more efcient.
CH APTER
Changing the Exposure During Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Interrupting the Current Job to Make Priority Copies (Interrupt Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Reserving a Job while the Machine is Warming Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Making a Copy Reservation while the Machine is Warming Up (Auto Start) . . . . . . . . 5-5 Reserving a Print Job of a Document Stored in a Box while the Machine is Warming Up (Auto Print) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Reserving the Next Job during Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Reserving a Copy Operation during Printing (Reserve Copy). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Reserving a Box Print while Printing (Reserve Print) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Printing Efciently 5-1 Using the Stack Bypass while Reserving Print Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Checking and Changing Printing Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Detailed Information for Printing Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canceling Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Priority Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating Print Jobs Sent from a Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing Secured Documents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking and Canceling Spool Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the Printing History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the Device Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 5-13 5-15 5-16 5-18 5-20 5-21 5-25 5-27
Changing the Exposure During Printing

You can change the copy or print exposure during printing.
Press the [Light] or [Dark] key on the right screen which appears during printing. The printing exposure is changed. NOTE
In the Copy function
Printing Efciently
In the Mail Box function When printing is completed, the display returns to the Basic Features screen if the last used function was the Copy function, or to the Box selection screen if it was the Mail Box function. NOTE
Adjusting the exposure after printing has started will produce a different result from the result before scanning the original.
5-2
Changing the Exposure During Printing
Interrupting the Current Job to Make Priority Copies (Interrupt Mode)

The Interrupt mode enables you to interrupt the reserved or current job long enough to make other priority copies. This mode is useful when making a rush copy during a long copy job. IMPORTANT
When making interrupt copy while the user restrictions are enabled with the control card, make copies without exchanging the control cards.
NOTE
You can make interrupt copies if the machine is ready to scan. You can set the modes for the Interrupt copy even while an original is being scanned into memory or into a box.
Interrupt
Press the The

Interrupt
key.
Guide
1
?
2 5 8 0
3 6 9
Clea
key remains constantly lit.
4 7
NOTE
When you want to copy after changing the Department ID while the Department ID Management is enabled, press the ID key and enter the Department ID and Password. (See Entering the Department ID and Password, on p. 10-4.) Even when you press the key, the job currently being output will not be interrupted until the interrupt copy starts.
Interrupt
Interrupt
Interrupt Mode
Processing /Data
Error
Place your original, then set the necessary copy mode. NOTE
You can cancel the Interrupt mode by pressing the key. You can cancel only the copy mode by pressing the key. (The Interrupt mode will not be can canceled.)
Interrupt Reset
5-3
Printing Efciently
ID
Start
Press the
key.
Interrupt
When the Interrupt copy job starts, the stops ashing.
key
3
Start
Stop
6 9
Clear
Once the original is scanned, remove it from the machine. IMPORTANT

When the interrupt copy job is completed, the interrupted printing operation restarts. If you want to continue the interrupt copy, wait until the current interrupt copy job is completed (end of printing).
5
5-4
Printing Efciently
Reserving a Job while the Machine is Warming Up

Even while the machine is warming up, an original can be scanned, or you can make print settings. IMPORTANT
If you scan originals while the machine is warming up, the time for the machine to warm up will be longer.
NOTE
Jobs can be reserved during the following status: - While the machine is warming up. - While the machine returns from each energy-saving status. - While the machine is warming up after a maintenance, inspection, or troubleshooting job.
Making a Copy Reservation while the Machine is Warming Up (Auto Start)
NOTE
While the machine is warming up, you can reserve up to ve copy jobs including the currently scanning original. However, an interrupt copy job is not counted. You can set a different mode for each job.
Auto Start
Start
Press the
key.
The message Scanning... appears on the display. A display shown on the right appears on the touch panel display, depending on the copy mode. To scan the next original, press the key again. When scanning is completed, press the [Done] key.
Start
NOTE
To cancel copying, press the [Cancel] key on the touch panel display or the key.
Stop
5-5
Printing Efciently
Place your originals and select the desired copy mode.
After the machine has nished warming up, printing starts. NOTE
If warm up ends while scanning is still in progress, printing starts at that point. You can change the exposure during printing. (See Changing the Exposure During Printing, on p. 5-2.)
Reserving a Print Job of a Document Stored in a Box while the Machine is Warming Up (Auto Print)
Specify the desired document with the procedure below.

MAIL BOX
2
Printing Efciently
To print without changing the settings, press the [Start Print] key. If you want to change settings before making a print, press the [Change P Settings] key and set the desired mode, then press the [Start Print] key. NOTE
To make a sample print, press the [Sample Print] key. (See Checking the Print Result or the Image of the Stored Document (Sample Print), on p. 488.) To erase the data after printing, press the [Print and Erase] key. To print after changing the settings, see Printing a Document Stored, in a Box after Changing the Settings, on p. 4-61.
Auto Print
5
5-6
Reserving the Next Job during Printing

While the machine is printing, you can scan other originals or make print settings. You can print the reserved job as soon as the current job is completed, so that you can reduce the time and effort needed to scan the originals. NOTE
You can reserve up to ve copy jobs for the Copy function including the current job. For the Mail Box function, you can reserve up to 32 documents regardless of the number of reserved jobs. However, interrupt copy jobs are not counted. You can set a different mode for each job.
Reserving a Copy Operation during Printing (Reserve Copy)

IMPORTANT
When reserving a copy job while the user restrictions are enabled with the control card, do not remove that control card after that job is completed. If you remove the control card during printing, the job reservation will be canceled.
Press the [Done] key on the right screen which appears during printing. NOTE
If the job displayed in the touch panel is the job of functions other than the Copy function, press the key to display the Basic Features screen.
COPY
Reserve Copy
Place your originals on the platen glass or in the feeder and set the desired copy mode.
5-7
Printing Efciently
Start
Press the nals.
key and start scanning origi3

Start Stop
6 9
Clear
NOTE
If the screen on the right appears, press the [OK] key and repeat the operation after the current job is completed.
5
5-8
Printing Efciently
Reserving a Box Print while Printing (Reserve Print)

If the job displayed in the job monitor is the job of functions other than the Mail Box function, press the key to display the Box selection screen.
MAIL BOX
Reserve Print
Specify the desired document with the procedure below. Select the desired box number, then the desired document NOTE Printing Efciently
When you select a box set with a password, enter the password after selecting the box. If the Box selection screen appears after step 1, specify the desired box number. To print without changing the settings, press the [Start Print] key. If you want to change settings before making a print, press the [Change P Settings] key and set the desired mode.
Press the [Start Print] key.
5-9
Using the Stack Bypass while Reserving Print Jobs

When paper is fed from the stack bypass for the current print job or for a reserved job, you can designate the paper to be placed in the stack bypass for the next reserved job.
Press the [StackBypass Setting] key on the Paper Selection screen that appears when setting reserved print settings. When there is no reserved print job, you can designate the paper size by pulling it out and reinserting it. NOTE
When Standard Stack Bypass Settings is set to "On", and the [Stack Bypass] key is selected, the paper stored in the standard settings is displayed. (See Setting the Standard Paper for the Stack bypass, on p. 6-19.)
StackBypass Setting
Printing Efciently
Select the paper size, and press the [Next] key. NOTE
To select A or B series paper size, press the [A/Bsize] key. When storing paper as the Standard Stack Bypass Settings, the paper size/type will be displayed. (See Setting the Standard Paper for the Stack bypass, on p. 6-19.)
5-10
The paper sizes previously set and the last set are displayed as shown in the screen on the right.
Paper size loaded presently Paper size selected
Press the [Done] key. Finish the reserved print settings.
Press the NOTE
key.
3
Start Stop
When reserving jobs of the Mail Box function, press the [Start Print] key.
6 9
Clear
5-11
Start
Printing Efciently
Set the specied paper when its turn comes to print. NOTE
The specied paper size is displayed when its turn comes to print.
Printing Efciently
Select the paper type, and press the [OK] key. The machine starts printing.
5
5-12
Checking and Changing Printing Status

You can check and change the printing status (Stand-by, Printing, etc.) using the System Monitor screen.
Checking Detailed Information for Printing Documents
Press the [System Monitor] key.
System Monitor
Select the [Copy] or [Print] key. NOTE

When checking the print status for copy jobs, press the [Copy] key. When checking the print status for all jobs, press the [Print] key.
Select the [Status] key.
5-13
Printing Efciently
Select the document you want to check the detailed information for and press the [Details] key. NOTE
The status of each icon displayed in the screen is as follows: : Operating : Waiting : Error : Paused : Canceling : Secured job : Copy job : Mail Box job : Printer job : Report job
5
Printing Efciently
Check the detailed information, and press the [Done] key. Repeating this operation returns the display to the Basic Features screen.
Details of a Copy document
Details of a Box document
5-14
Canceling Printing
Select the [Copy] or [Print] key. NOTE

When checking the print status for copy jobs, press the [Copy] key. When checking the print status for all jobs, press the [Print] key.
Select the document to be canceled, and press the [Cancel] key. NOTE
You cannot select multiple documents and cancel them all in one action.
5-15
Printing Efciently
Press the [Yes] key. NOTE

To cancel the cancellation, press the [No] key. The canceled document is displayed as NG on the Print Log screen.
Press the [Done] key. Repeating this operation returns the display to the Basic Features screen.
Printing Efciently
Priority Printing
NOTE
When you set the priority printing, the machine starts printing it after the currently printing document is completed.
Priority Printing
5-16
Select the document for priority printing and press the [Print Next] key.
5-17
Printing Efciently
Operating Print Jobs Sent from a Computer

You can temporarily stop the print job sent from a computer, or skip an error when a print error occurs.
2
Printing Efciently
5-18
Select the desired document, and press the [Details] key.
Press the [] key. Perform operations of the print job. When you nish operating the document, press the [Done] key.
NOTE
When you press the [Pause] key, printing stops temporarily, and the key changes to the [Resume] key. When you press the [Resume] key, printing restarts. You can continue the print job even when a print error occurred, by pressing the [Auto Continue] key, depending on the type of error. However, the print output may not be the same as expected. When printing is canceled from the computer or when the data is less than the volume of one page, that job may not be correctly performed. When you press the [Form Feed] key, you can force the print data remaining in memory to be output.
5-19
Printing Efciently
Printing Secured Documents

You can print documents with a password sent from a computer. Documents with a password are called secured documents. Secured documents waiting to be printed are displayed with a mark at the left of the job number. To print these documents, you need to enter a password, which prevents other people who do not know the password from observing the contents. IMPORTANT
If the main power is turned OFF, the secured documents are erased. The secured document will be erased after the printing is completed. You cannot change the settings of the secured document.
Job Monitor Secured Documents
Printing Efciently
5-20
Select the desired secured document, and press the [Secured Print] key.
Enter a password, and press the [OK] key. If there is a current job or a previously reserved job, the machine will start printing after that job is completed. IMPORTANT Printing Efciently 5-21
Enter the same password set in the operation from the computer. The machine becomes ready to print the document.
NOTE
To cancel the printing, press the [Cancel] key.
Checking and Canceling Spool Status

When print data is sent to this machine from a computer, the machine will process the input/output data after temporarily storing it. NOTE
Spool Status will be displayed only when the printer function is attached.
Select the [Spool Status] key.
Printing Efciently
Press the [
] key.
When you cancel spool job: Select the [Status] key.
5-22
Select the document to be canceled, and press the [Cancel] key.

To cancel the cancellation, press the [No] key.
Select the document you want to check the detailed information for and press the [Details] key.
5-23
Printing Efciently
When you check the detailed information: Select the [Status] or [Log] key.
Details of a status
Printing Efciently
Details of a log
Check the detailed information, and press the [Done] key. The display return to the Basic Features screen.
5
5-24
Checking the Printing History
Press the [Log] key.
Press the [Job Type] key.
5-25
Printing Efciently
Select the type of job that you want to check the log. NOTE
The [Printer] key is displayed only when the network printer function is enabled.
After checking the printing job history, press the [Done] key. The display returns to the Basic Features screen. NOTE
When the document has been printed correctly, OK is shown. NG is shown for documents of which printing has been canceled. In the Log, the printing job history of up to 40 documents can be displayed.
Printing Efciently
When you select the [Details] key: The screen on the right appears. Check the detailed information, and press the [Done] key. Repeat this until the Basic Features screen appears again.
5
5-26
Checking the Device Status

You can check the amount of paper remaining in each paper drawer, the remaining memory available, the location of a paper jam, and so on.
Device Status
Select the [Device] key.
After checking the device status, press the [Done] key. The display returns to the Basic Features screen. NOTE
The [Paper Jams], [Staple Loading], [Staple Jams], [Adding Toner] or [Punch Waste] key appears below the Recovery Steps, depending on each status. When you press each key, the display shows how to remove the jammed paper, how to add toner, etc.
5-27
Printing Efciently
5
5-28
Printing Efciently
CH APTER
This chapter describes the initial settings and how to change them to suit your needs.
Setting the Timer (Timer Settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24 Setting the Current Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24 Setting the Time to Initiate Auto Sleep after Finishing Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26 Setting the Time Taken for Display to Return to Basic Screen after Finishing Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27 Setting the Time Taken for the Unit to Quiet Down after Last Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28 Setting the Time That the Units Power Turns OFF on Different Days of the Week . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29 Setting the Low-Power Mode Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30 Adjusting the Machine (Adjustment/Cleaning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31 Fine-adjusting Zoom When Differences in Original Image and Print Image Occur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31 Staple Repositioning for Saddle Finisher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32 Changing the Saddle Stitch Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33 Adjusting the Standard Exposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34 Setting Specications of the Copy Function (Copy Settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Standard Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Automatic Collate On/ Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Image Orientation Priority to On/ Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Job Duration Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Auto Orientation to On/ Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35 6-35 6-37 6-38 6-39 6-40
6-1
Additional Functions Settings Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Setting Specications that are Common to Each Function (Common Settings) . . . . . . . 6-6 Selecting the Initial Function at Power ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Selecting the Default Display After Auto Clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Setting Entry Tone, Error Tone, Job Done Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Setting Inch Input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 Setting a Paper Drawer for Auto Paper Selection/ Auto Drawer Switching . . . . . . . . 6-10 Identifying the Type of Paper in a Paper Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12 Changing the Energy Saver Mode Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14 Setting the Functions Keys as keys to Reactivate the Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 Setting the Energy Consumption in the Sleep Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 Distinguishing LTRR-Size and STMT-Size Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16 Setting a Dedicated Tray for Each Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17 Setting the Printing Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18 Setting the Standard Paper for the Stack bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19 Setting a Standard Mode for Local Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21 Returning the Common Settings to Their Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
6. Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your Needs

Setting the Photo Mode of the Copy Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-41 Changing the Current Standard Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-42 Restoring Settings to Default Copy Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-45 Setting Specications of the Mail Box Function (Mail Box Settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-46 Setting/ Storing the Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-46 Initializing a Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-49 Setting the Photo Mode of the Mail Box Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-51 Setting the Standard mode for Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-52 Setting Specications of the System Management ID (System Settings). . . . . . . . . . . .6-55 Setting/ Changing the System Manager ID and Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-55 Setting the Department ID Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-58 Setting Device Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-72 Erasing a Message Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-73 Setting the Auto Ofine On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-74 Printing the Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-75 Printing the Contents of the Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-75
6
6-2
Additional Functions Settings Table

The following items can be stored or set in the Additional Functions screen. (* indicates factory default setting) NOTE
In addition to the modes listed below, the [Printer Settings], [Network Settings], and [Remote UI On/Off] modes are displayed when the network printer function is enabled. For details of the following settings, refer to the instruction manual for the relevant function. - [Printer Settings] (See the PS/PCL Reference Guide.) - [Remote UI On/Off] (See the Remote UI Guide.) - [Network Settings] (See the Network Guide.)
Applicable page
Additional Function
Common Settings Initial Function
Available settings
Copy*/ Mail Box Set System Monitor Screen as initial function: On/ Off* Set [Device] as the default for System Monitor : On*/ Off Initial Function*/ Selected Function Entry Tone/ Error Tone/ Job Done Tone (All On*/Off) On*/ Off Copy*/ Printer/ Mail Box/ Other (Stack bypass: On/ Off*, Drawers: On*/ Off) Copy: Consider Paper Type: On/ Off* Paper drawer (1, 2), Paper Deck: Plain*/ Heavy/ Recycled/ Color/ Letterhead/ Bond/ 3-Hole Punch Paper drawer (3, 4): Plain*/ Recycled/ Color/ Letterhead/ Bond/ 3-Hole Punch 10%*/ 25%/ 50%/ None On/ Off* Low*/ High Distinguish Manually/ Use LTRR Format*/ Use STMT Format Tray A: Copy*/ Printer*/ Other* Tray B: Copy*/ Printer*/ Other* 1:Copy (Priority)/ 2:Printer/ 3:Other On/ Off*
p. 6-6
Auto Clear Setting Audible Tones Inch Entry Drawer Eligibility For APS/ ADS Store Paper Type
p. 6-7 p. 6-8
p. 6-12
Energy Saver Mode Function Key Wake Up Energy Consumption in Sleep Mode LTRR/STMT Original Selection Tray Designation Printing Priority Standard Stack Bypass Settings
p. p. p. p.
6-14 6-15 6-15 6-16
p. 6-17 p. 6-18 p. 6-19
6-3
p. 6-9 p. 6-10
Additional Function
Common Settings Standard Local Print Settings
Available settings
Paper Select: Auto*/ Select paper supply Copies: 1* to 2,000 sets Finisher: - With the Finisher Do not Collate/ Collate/ Offset Collate*/ Group/ Offset Group/ Staple (Corner (TopLeft/ BtmLeft/ TopRight/ BtmRight), Double (Left/ Right)) - With the Finisher+Puncher Unit-B1 Do not Collate/ Collate/ Offset Collate*/ Group/ Offset Group/ Staple (Corner (TopLeft/ BtmLeft/ TopRight/ BtmRight), Double (Left/ Right))/ Hole Punch - With the Copy Tray-C3 Do not Collate/ Collate*/ Rotate Collating/ Group/ Rotate Grouping Two-sided Print : On/ Off* Erase Document After Printing : On/ Off* Merge Documents: On/ Off* Initialize Default setting (12-digit number) Time Zone Settings: GMT12:00 to GMT+12:00, (GMT5:00*) Summertime Settings: On/ Off* 10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50 min., 1 hour*, 90 min., 2, 3, 4 hours 0 (no setting), 1 to 9 min., 2 min.* 0 (no setting), 1 to 9 min., 1 min.* Sunday to Saturday, 00:00 to 23:59 in one-minute increments 10, 15*, 20, 30, 40, 50 min., 1 hour, 90 min., 2, 3, 4 hours X/ Y: 0*, 1.0% to +1.0% in 0.1% increments Press the [Start] key.
Applicable page
p. 6-21
Initialize Common Settings Timer Settings Date & Time Settings
p. 6-23 p. 6-24
Change Auto Sleep Time Change Auto Clear Time Time Until Unit Quiets Down Daily Timer Settings Low Power ModeTime Adjustment/Cleaning Zoom Fine Adjustment Saddle Stitcher Staple Repositioning Saddle Stitch Position Adjustment Exposure Recalibration Feeder Cleaning Wire Cleaning
p. 6-26 p. 6-27 p. 6-28 p. 6-29 p. 6-30
p. 6-31 p. 6-32
2.0 mm to +2.0 mm (0 mm*) in 0.25 mm increments p. 6-33 9 Steps, 5* Press the [Start] key. Press the [Start] key. p. 6-34 p. 8-30 p. 8-31
6
6-4
Additional Function
Copy Settings Standard Key 1, 2 Settings Auto Collate Image Orientation Priority Job Duration Display Auto Orientation Photo Mode Standard Settings Initialize Copy Settings Mail Box Settings Box Set/Store
Available settings
All modes (No setting*) On*/ Off On/ Off* On/ Off* On*/ Off On/ Off* Store, Initialize Initialize Number: 0 to 99 Store Name: 24 characters max. Password: 7 digit number max. Doc. Auto Erase: 1, 2, 3, 6, 12 hours, 1, 2, 3*, 7, 30 days, 0 (no limit) Initialize On/ Off* Store, Initialize System Manager: 32 characters max. System Manager ID: 7 digit number max. System Password: 7 digit number max. E-mail Address: 64 characters max. Contact Information: 32 characters max. Comment: 32 characters max. Department ID Management: On/ Off* (Store Dept. ID/Password, Print Totals, Accept Jobs with unknown ID: On*/ Off) Device Name: 32 characters Location: 32 characters Erase On/ Off* Print
Applicable page
p. 6-35 p. 6-37 p. 6-38 p. 6-39 p. 6-40 p. 6-41 p. 6-42 p. 6-45 p. 6-46
Photo Mode Standard Scan Settings System Settings System Manager Settings
p. 6-51 p. 6-52 p. 6-55
Department ID Management
p. 6-58
Device Info Settings Clear Message Board Auto Offline Report Settings User s Data List
p. 6-72 p. 6-73 p. 6-74 p. 6-75
6-5
Setting Specications that are Common to Each Function (Common Settings)

NOTE
The Common Settings screen is made up of several screens. Use the [ ] and [ ] keys to scroll to the desired screen and make the required settings. When the [ ] or [ ] key should be pressed, the indication is displayed in this manual.
Selecting the Initial Function at Power ON

You can specify which screen to display, when you turn ON the main power. The System Monitor screen also can be specied. NOTE
The default settings as follows: - Select Initial Function: Copy - Set System Monitor Screen as initial function: Off - Set [Device] as the default for System Monitor: On
1
Call up the desired screen as follows:

key
Common Settings
Initial Function
Select the [Copy] or [Mail Box] key, and press the [OK] key. When you select the [Copy] key: The Copy Basic Features screen is displayed when the main power is turned ON, or after Auto Clear. When you select the [Mail Box] key: The Mail Box selection screen is displayed when the main power is turned ON, or after Auto Clear. When using the System Monitor screen as initial screen: Select the [On] key, and press the [OK] key. The System Monitor screen is displayd when the main power is turned ON, or after Auto Clear. NOTE
When you do not want to set the Device window as a default window in the System Monitor screen, press the [Off] key and press the [OK] key. When you select the [Off] key, the Copy window is set as the default window.
6
6-6
Setting Specifications that are Common to Each Function (Common Settings)
Press the [Done] key. Repeat this until the Basic Features screen appears again.
Selecting the Default Display After Auto Clear

Gives you the choice of whether or not to display the screen set by this function after Auto Clear has taken place. NOTE
The time delay for Auto Clear can be set. (See Setting the Time Taken for Display to Return to Basic Screen after Finishing Operations, on p. 6-27.) The default setting is Initial Function.
1 2

key
Auto Clear Setting
Select the [Initial Function] or [Selected Function] key, and press the [OK] key. Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your Needs 6-7 When you select the [Initial Function] key: The screen set under Initial Function is displayed after Auto Clear has taken place. For example, if Copy is set under Initial Function and Auto Clear takes place after setting the Mail Box function, the display returns to the Copy Basic Features screen. When you select the [Selected Function] key: The display returns to the screen that was displayed before Auto Clear takes place. For example, even if Copy is set under Initial Function and Auto Clear takes place after setting the Mail Box function, the display returns to the Mail Box selection screen.
Setting Entry Tone, Error Tone, Job Done Tone

Gives you the choice of whether or not to sound audible tones. The following tones sound at the following times: Entry Tone Error Tone Job Done Tone NOTE
The default setting is On for all tones.
: When pressing keys on the control panel or keys in the touch panel display : When a malfunction occurs (e.g. paper jam or operational error) : After the last copy has been made (e.g. outputting or stapling is completed)
1 2

key
Audible Tones
Select the [On] or [Off] keys for Entry Tone, Error Tone and Job Done Tone, and press the [OK] key.
6
6-8
Setting Inch Input

You can display the keys for entering values in inches in the numeric entry screen. NOTE
The default setting is On.
1 2

key
Inch Entry
Select the [On] or [Off] key, and press the [OK] key.
Repeat this until the Basic Features screen appears again.
6-9
Setting a Paper Drawer for Auto Paper Selection/ Auto Drawer Switching
The paper drawers to be used for Automatic Paper Selection and Auto Drawer Switching can be set. This setting can be made independently for Copy, Mail Box, and other functions. It is useful when different paper drawers are to be used for different purposes. NOTE
Paper drawers set to On are used for the following functions: - Auto Paper Selection (APS) : The machine automatically selects the appropriate paper size (paper drawer) for the size of the original and the set ratio. - Auto Drawer Switching (ADS) : If a paper drawer runs out of paper during a continuous printing job, the machine automatically selects another paper drawer with the same paper size and begins feeding paper from that paper drawer. The default settings are Off for the stack bypass and On for the paper drawers (1 to 4).
1 2

key
Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS
Select the [Copy], [Mail Box], [Printer] or [Other] key. NOTE

You can select the [Printer] and [Other] keys only when the network printer function is enabled. The [Other] key is pressed when setting the paper drawers to be reported with the report printing.
6
6-10
Select the [On] or [Off] key for the stack bypass and each paper drawer, and press the [OK] key. When you select the [On] key: Makes the paper drawer eligible for APS/ ADS. When you select the [Off] key: Makes the paper drawer ineligible for APS/ ADS. NOTE
When you select the [Copy] key, you can select whether or not to set priority to paper type. If you set the [Consider Paper Type] key to On, paper will not be fed even when paper runs out during printing, unless other loaded papers suit the size and stored type. For details of stored paper types, see Identifying the Type of Paper in a Paper Drawer, on p. 6-12. If you set the [Consider Paper Type] key to Off, paper will be fed from another paper drawer when paper runs out during printing, if the same paper size is loaded in that paper drawer. When you select the [Printer] key, the Stack bypass is not displayed. icon The number of each paper drawer indicates the following places.
When you select the [Copy] key.
Stack bypass
Paper Drawer 1 Paper Drawer 2 Paper Drawer 3 Paper Drawer 4 Paper Deck (option)
6-11
Identifying the Type of Paper in a Paper Drawer

You can store the paper type loaded to each paper drawer.
1 2

key
Store Paper Type
Select the paper drawer for which you want to store the paper type.
3
Select the paper type loaded in the paper drawer, and press the [OK] key. NOTE
Load the same type of paper as set in each paper drawer. For details of paper types, see Available Paper Stock, on p. 1-17. The number of each paper drawer indicates the following places.
Paper Drawer 1 Paper Drawer 2 Paper Drawer 3 Paper Drawer 4 Paper Deck (option)
6
6-12
Press the [Done] key. Repeat this until the Basic Features screen appears again. NOTE
The paper types stored here are displayed when selecting paper in each mode, as shown on the right.
6-13
Changing the Energy Saver Mode Setting

You can change the Energy Saver mode that reduces the power consumed by the machine. NOTE
The default setting is 10%.
1 2

key
Energy Saver Mode
Select the [-10%], [-25%], [-50%] or [None] key, and press the [OK] key. NOTE
The approximate energy savings gures for each mode and the approximate delay times from power ON to ready to print status are listed below. - 10% mode : 10% less power (approx. 50 sec.)* - 25% mode : 25% less power (approx. 90 sec.)* - 50% mode : 50% less power (approx. 180 sec.)* - None : 2% less power (approx. 0 sec.)* * The gures in parenthesis ( ) show the approximate time it takes for the machine to return to the ready to print status.
6
6-14
Setting the Functions Keys as keys to Reactivate the Machine

You can set the Saver mode. NOTE
The default setting is Off.
COPY
MAIL BOX
, and
SCAN
keys as the keys to reactivate the machine from the Energy
1 2

key
Function Key Wake Up
Setting the Energy Consumption in the Sleep Mode

You can set the amount of energy consumption when the machine is in the Sleep mode. NOTE
In the following cases, the energy consumption when the machine enters the Sleep mode will be High regardless of this setting. For details such as setting each function, see the Network Guide or the Printer Guide. - [Function Key Wake Up]:ON - [TCP/IP Settings] [IP Address] [DHCP]:ON - [NetWare Settings]:ON - [AppleTalk Settings]:ON The default setting is Low.

key
Energy Consumption in Sleep Mode
6-15
Select the [Low] or [High] key, and press the [OK] key.
Distinguishing LTRR-Size and STMT-Size Originals

When scanning LTRR size or STMT size originals set on the platen glass, you can make a setting to either distinguish the original sizes manually, or to scan originals of only one of these sizes. NOTE
The default setting is Use LTRR Format.
1 2

key
LTRR/ STMT Original Selection
Select the [Distinguish Manually], [Use LTRR Format] or [Use STMT Format] key, and press the [OK] key. When you select the [Distinguish Manually] key: If you place LTRR or STMT-size original on the platen glass, a display to select the original size appears when scanning. When you select the [Use LTRR Format] key: If you place LTRR or STMT-size original on the platen glass, the machine detects it as LTRRsize original. When you select the [Use STMT Format] key: If you place LTRR or STMT-size original on the platen glass, the machine detects it as STMTsize original.
6
6-16
Setting a Dedicated Tray for Each Function

You can select the function for which each output tray of the Finisher-F1 (option) or the Saddle Finisher-F2 (option) is to be used. IMPORTANT
This function cannot be set when the Finisher-F1 or the Saddle Finisher-F2 is not attached.
NOTE
The default settings are as follows: - Tray A: Copy, Printer, Other - Tray B: Copy, Printer, Other It is possible to assign a single tray to multiple functions. We recommend attaching the supplied labels to the trays for identifying their respective use. Blank labels are also provided which you can ll out yourself.
1 2

key
Tray Designation
Select the functions of dedicated output trays A and B, and press the [OK] key. NOTE
You can select the [Printer] key only when the network printer function is enabled. Prints of the Mail Box and Report are output as Other. When the paper reaches the stacking limit of the tray while both trays are set as the designated tray for a certain function, the machine automatically changes the output tray to other available tray. When you want to set a tray as the designated tray for only a certain function, select only that function.
6-17
Setting the Printing Priority

You can set the printing priority. A job that is set to a high priority is printed preferentially after the job currently being performed. NOTE
The default settings are as follows: - Copy: 1 (Priority) Printer: 2 Other: 3 (1, 2 and 3 indicate priority sequence.) Priority printing will not take place even when you set the highest priority until the current job is completed. However, if the current job is paused, printing of the job from a function with higher priority may be started depending on the settings set.
1 2

key
Printing Priority
Select the printing priority, and press the [OK] key. Setting [1] sets the highest printing priority. NOTE
You can select the [Printer] key only when the network printer function is enabled. Prints of the Mail Box and Report are output as Others. When the same printing priority has been set for multiple functions, printing starts from whichever of the functions is set to print rst.
6
6-18
Setting the Standard Paper for the Stack bypass

Stores the default settings for the StackBypass Setting. By pressing the [Stack Bypass] key when making reserved prints, you can reserve by the mode that you stored here. NOTE
The default setting is Off. When using the stack bypass as a paper source for the Copy and Mail Box functions, you must select the stack bypass as the Auto Paper Drawer Selection.
1 2

key
Standard Stack Bypass Settings
Select the [On] or [Off] key. NOTE

When you select the [On] key, the mode returns to the stored standard paper mode when you press the key or after Auto Clear has taken place.
Reset
When you select the [Off] key: Proceed to step 3. Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your Needs 6-19
When you select the [On] key: Press the [Store] key.
Press the [OK] key.
4
6
6-20
Setting a Standard Mode for Local Printing

The machine prints documents with the standard Local Print settings set here when printing documents in the Mail Box without changing the settings set when documents were scanned, or when printing documents sent from a personal computer after pressing the [Change P Settings] key. It also prints with the standard Local Print settings when you merge documents. Paper Select (Paper source) Copies Finisher -With the Finisher Do not Collate/ Collate/ Offset Collate*/ Group/ Offset Group/ Staple (Corner (TopLeft/ BtmLeft/ TopRight/ BtmRight), Double (Left/ Right)) -With the Finisher+Puncher Unit-B1 Do not Collate/ Collate/ Offset Collate*/ Group/ Offset Group/ Staple (Corner (TopLeft/ BtmLeft/ TopRight/ BtmRight), Double (Left/ Right))/ Hole Punch -With the Copy Tray-C3 Do not Collate/ Collate*/ Rotate Collate/ Group/ Rotate Group Two-sided Print (On/ Off) Erase Document After Printing (On/ Off) Merge Documents (On/ Off) NOTE
The default settings are as follows: - Paper Select : Auto - Copies :1 - Finisher : Offset Collate (With the Finisher) - Two-sided Print : Off - Erase Document After Printing : Off - Merge Documents : Off

key
Standard Local Print Settings
6-21
Set each mode. Paper Select Select the paper source. Copies Set the number of copies from 1 set to 2000 sets. Finisher Set the type of collating. Two-sided Print Set whether or not to perform two-sided printing. Erase Document After Printing Set whether or not to erase the document after printing. Merge Documents Set whether or not to merge documents when you select multiple documents.
Once you have completed all settings, press the [Done] key.
6
6-22
Returning the Common Settings to Their Defaults

This function allows you to return the common settings to their defaults (initial settings).
1 2

key
Initialize Common Settings
Select the [Yes] key. NOTE

To cancel initialization, select the [No] key.
This screen is displayed for about two seconds.
6-23
Setting the Timer (Timer Settings)

NOTE
The Timer Settings screen is made up of several screens. Use the [ ] and [ ] keys to scroll to the desired screen and make the required settings. When the [ ] or [ ] key should be pressed, the indication is displayed in this manual.
Setting the Current Date and Time

Sets the current date and time. The date and time set here is also used as the time setting required for functions for which the time can be set.
1 2

key
Timer Settings
Date & Time Settings
Enter the current date (year, month, day) and time with the Numeric keys ( 0 - 9 ), and press the [OK] key. NOTE
Enter the date as four digits without a space. - Example: March 25 0325 Enter all the four digits for the year. Enter the time in 24-hour notation as four digits without a space. - Example: 7:05 a.m. 0705 11:18 p.m. 2318 If you make a mistake when entering values, press the C key, and enter the values again starting with the year.
Clear
When setting the Time Zone Settings: Press the [Time Zone Settings] key, then select the time zone where the machine is located. Then press the [OK] key. NOTE
Press the [ ] or [ ] key to scroll the list. The default setting is GMT5:00. Central time (US Canada) :GMT5:00 Eastern time (US Canada) :GMT6:00 Mountain time (US Canada) :GMT7:00 Pacic time (US Canada) :GMT8:00
6
6-24
When setting the Daylight Saving Time Settings: Press the [Daylight Saving Time Setting] key, then press the [ON] key.
Press both the [Start Date] and [End Date] keys to set the time.
Set the month, week, day, time to start and end the Daylight Saving Time settings, and press the [OK] key. NOTE
You can set the time from 0-23, in 1 hour increments. The default setting is Off. When you set the Daylight Saving Time, the machine automatically sets the standard time of the machine one-hour forward.
6-25
Setting the Time to Initiate Auto Sleep after Finishing Operations

If the machine is not operated (no keys are pressed) for a certain period of time, the control panel power switch automatically switches OFF to save power. The machine then enters the Sleep mode. NOTE
The default setting is 1 hour.
1 2

key
Change Auto Sleep Time
Enter the desired Auto Sleep Time with the [] or [] key, and press the [OK] key. The Auto Sleep Time settings are 10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50 minutes, 1 hour, 90 minutes and 2 to 4 hours (in one-hour increments).
6
6-26
Setting the Time Taken for Display to Return to Basic Screen after Finishing Operations
If the machine is not operated (no keys are pressed) for a certain period of time, the display returns to the Basic screen (Standard setting) of the selected function. This time is called Auto Clear Time. Auto Clear Time can be set from 1 to 9 minutes in one-minute increments. Auto Clear Time can also be set to Off. NOTE
The default setting is 2 minutes. When 0 is set, Auto Clear function is not set.
1 2

key
Change Auto Clear Time
Enter the desired time period with the Numeric keys ( 0 - 9 ) or [] and [+] keys, and press the [OK] key. The Auto Clear Time settings are from 0 to 9 minutes (in one-minute increments). Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your Needs 6-27
Setting the Time Taken for the Unit to Quiet Down after Last Task
This machine enters the Quiet mode after a specied amount of time has elapsed following a print job or after a key has been pressed. On this screen you can specify the amount of time that must elapse prior to entering the Quiet mode. NOTE
The default setting is 1 minute. When 0 is set, the Quiet mode is not set.
1 2

key
Time Until Unit Quiets Down
Enter the desired time period with the Numeric keys ( 0 - 9 ) or [] and [+] keys, and press the [OK] key. The Quiet mode settings are from 0 to 9 minutes (in one-minute increments).
6
6-28
Setting the Time That the Units Power Turns OFF on Different Days of the Week
You can set the time that the machine is automatically turned OFF for each day of the week. Setting range: Daily from Sunday to Saturday, 00:00 to 23:59 in one-minute increments NOTE
The default setting is no setting. When Auto Clear Time and Daily Timer are both set, Auto Clear Time has priority.
1 2

key
Daily Timer Settings
Select the day of the week, enter the time with the Numeric keys ( 0 - 9 ), and press the [OK] key. NOTE
Enter the time in 24-hour notation as four digits without a space. - Example: 7:05 a.m. 0705 11:18 p.m. 2318 If you make a mistake when entering the time, choose the day of the week again, then enter a four-digit number. If you do not want to specify the time, press the C key.
Clear
6-29
Setting the Low-Power Mode Time

If the machine is not operated (no keys are pressed) for a certain period of time after prints have been made or a key operation performed, the machine automatically enters the Low-Power mode. You can easily change the time for the machine to enter the Low-Power mode. NOTE
The default setting is 15 minutes.
1 2

key
Low-Power Mode Time
Select the Low-Power Mode Time by pressing the [] or [] key, and press the [OK] key. The Low-Power Mode Time settings are 10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50 minutes, 1 hour, 90 minutes and 2 to 4 hours (in one-hour increments).
6
6-30
Adjusting the Machine (Adjustment/Cleaning)

NOTE
The Adjustment/Cleaning screen is made up of several screens. Use the [ ] and [ ] keys to scroll to the desired screen and make the required settings. When the [ ] or [ ] key should be pressed, the indication is displayed in this manual.
Fine-adjusting Zoom When Differences in Original Image and Print Image Occur
When you print a copy or a document in a box, if a slight difference occurs between the size of the original image and the size of the print image, you can perform ne adjustment so as to reduce this error.
1 2

key
Adjustment/ Cleaning
Zoom Fine Adjustment
The adjustment range for both the X (left-right direction) and the Y (up-down direction) is from 1.0 % to +1.0 % in 0.1 % increments.
6-31
Press the [] or [+] key to adjust the percentage (%), and press the [OK] key.
Staple Repositioning for Saddle Finisher

After a staple jam in the Saddle Finisher Unit has been cleared or staples are loaded in the Saddle Finisher, this function feeds paper to the unit and staples a few times, so that staples will be immediately available for the next job. IMPORTANT
This function cannot be set when the Saddle Finisher-F2 is not attached.
NOTE
The required paper is fed automatically. The following paper sizes can be used for this function: 11"x17"/ LTRR.
1 2

key
Saddle Stitcher Staple Repositioning
Press the [Start] key. NOTE

To cancel the staple repositioning, press the [Cancel] key.
6
6-32
Changing the Saddle Stitch Position

When the Saddle Finisher-F2 is attached, slight position differences in the saddle stitch position may occur. You can compensate for such differences. IMPORTANT
This function cannot be set when the Saddle Finisher-F2 is not attached.
1 2

key
Saddle Stitch Position Adjustment
Select the paper size for which you want to change the saddle stitch position. NOTE
Some of the paper sizes displayed may not be available in certain countries.
Use the [] and [] keys to adjust the saddle stitch position, and press the [OK] key. The setting range is from 2.0 mm to +2.0 mm, in 0.25 mm increments.
The example shows adjustment for 11"x17"-size paper.
6-33
Adjusting the Standard Exposure

Adjusts the exposure adjustment scale to calibrate differences in exposure. Perform this adjustment if differences between the image in the original and the print occur when printing an original free from smudges or dirty marks with the exposure scale set in the middle. NOTE
The default setting is 5.
1 2

key
Press the [Light] or [Dark] keys to adjust the exposure, and press the [OK] key.
6
6-34
Setting Specications of the Copy Function

(Copy Settings)
NOTE
The Copy Settings screen is made up of several screens. Use the [ ] and [ ] keys to scroll to the desired screen and make the required settings. When the [ ] or [ ] key should be pressed, the indication is displayed in this manual.
Setting Standard Keys

You can store up to two Standard keys from the Copy Ratio, Finisher and Two-sided Mode keys on the Basic Features screen, the keys in the Special Features screen, or the memory keys containing copy jobs stored in the Mode Memory.
1 2

key
Standard Key Settings
Press the [] or [] key and press the group of the function that you want to store as your favorite key. Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your Needs 6-35
Select the desired mode to be stored as a Standard key, and press the [OK] key.
Setting Specifications of the Copy Function (Copy Settings)
Selected mode
Example: Standard keys 1 and 2 are displayed in the touch panel display as shown on the right.
Standard key 2 Standard key 1
6-36
Setting Automatic Collate On/ Off

This function allows automatic selection of the Collate (Offset Collate) mode when the original is placed in the feeder. This is helpful when making multiple copies, because the user does not need to remember to select the Finisher mode. NOTE
When Auto Collate is set to On with the Finisher (option) attached, the Offset Collate mode will be set. Without any output option attached, the Collate mode will be set. The default setting is On.
1 2

key
Copy Settings
Auto Collate
6-37
Setting Image Orientation Priority to On/ Off

The orientation of the image may be printed conversely depending on the copy mode set. You can set whether or not to copy the image in the same direction as the original. NOTE
The default setting is Off. When the Image Orientation Priority is On, the rst copy time will take longer.
1 2

key
Image Orientation Priority
6
6-38
Setting the Job Duration Display

When the Job Duration Display is set to On, the time remaining until completion of the copy job (Job Duration Time) is indicated in minutes in the touch panel display. (The job duration time is not displayed for some copy modes.) NOTE
The default setting is Off. The job duration time is not displayed for the Transparency Interleaving, Cover/Sheet Insertion, Different Size Originals, Rotate Collating, and Rotate Grouping modes or when the copy waiting time is less than one minute.
1 2

key
Job Duration Display
6-39
Setting Auto Orientation to On/ Off

Using parameters such as original size and zoom ratio, this function automatically rotates the image to the most suitable position for the set paper size. NOTE
The default setting is On.
1 2

key
Auto Orientation
Select the [On] or [Off] key, and press the [OK] key. NOTE
Only standard size originals up to LTR (for direct zoom ratio) can be rotated. The Auto Orientation will not be performed when you set Enlarging. When Automatic Paper Selection is selected, the paper matching the width will be displayed as the optimum size if there is no paper with the optimum length.
6
6-40
Setting the Photo Mode of the Copy Function

You can set whether or not to use the Photo mode in the Copy function. When the Photo Mode is On, you can select the [Printed Img.] and [Photo] keys when making copies with the image quality setting. NOTE
1 2

key
Photo Mode
6-41
Changing the Current Standard Settings

Standard Settings refers to a combination of copy modes that the machine is set to after the power is turned ON or when the key is pressed. This section describes how to store the currently set copy settings as the Standard Settings. Standard Settings can also be returned to their default settings.
Reset
NOTE
The default settings are as follows: - Copy quantity: 1 - Paper selection: Automatic Paper Selection - Exposure/ Image quality: A - Copy Ratio: Direct (100%) - Copy function: 11-sided copy
Storing the Standard Settings for Copying

NOTE
To change the Standard Settings, Copy settings must already have been stored as the Standard Settings beforehand. (See Flow of Copy Operations, on p. 2-3.)
1

key
Standard Settings
6
6-42
Press the [Yes] key. The settings currently displayed are stored as the Standard Settings. NOTE
The settings displayed here are the currently set copy settings. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to display copy modes that do not t in the display area. To cancel storing the currently displayed settings as the Standard Settings, press the [No] key. The display returns to the screen in step 2.
Repeat this until the Basic Features screen appears again.
Initializing the Standard Settings
1 2

key
Press the [Initialize] key.
6-43
Check the setting, and press the [Yes] key. The Standard Settings are initialized. NOTE
To cancel the initialization, press the [No] key. The display returns to the screen in step 2.
4
6
6-44
Restoring Settings to Default Copy Settings

Items that have been changed in the Copy Settings can be returned to their default settings.
1 2

key
Initialize Copy Settings
Press the [Yes] key. Proceed to step 3. NOTE

To cancel the initialization of copy settings, press the [No] key. The display returns to Copy Setting screen.
6-45
Setting Specications of the Mail Box Function

(Mail Box Settings)
Setting/ Storing the Box
When using the box, you can set and store each box item beforehand. NOTE
A box can store up to 100 items (Box number: 00 to 99).
1 2

key
Mail Box Settings
Box Set/ Store
Press the desired box number. NOTE

When entering the box number using the Numeric keys ( 0 - 9 ), press the [OK] key after entering the box number.
Enter the password, and press the [OK] key. NOTE

Enter the password stored under Box Set/Store setting. This step is not required when setting the box for the rst time or if a password is not stored.
6
6-46
Setting Specifications of the Mail Box Function (Mail Box Settings)
Enter the box name, and press the [OK] key. NOTE
For details on how to enter the characters, see Entering Characters on the Touch Panel Display, on p. 10-6. The maximum number of characters you can assign for a name is 24. To cancel storing, press the [Cancel] key.
Enter the password with the Numeric keys ( 0 - 9 ). IMPORTANT

Since there is no way to check the password stored, please record the password you stored and keep it separately.
Reset
1
Guide
2 5 8 0
3
Start
?
4 7
6 9
Clear
NOTE
If no password is stored, proceed to step 7. You can delete the number you entered by pressing the C key. To cancel storing, press the [Cancel] key.
Clear
Interrupt
ID
Set the amount of time to elapse before received documents are automatically deleted by pressing the [] or [] key, and press the [OK] key. NOTE
The default setting is 3 days.
6-47
6
6-48
Initializing a Box
IMPORTANT
You cannot initialize a box if there is data remaining in it.
1 2

key
Select the box that you want to initialize. NOTE

When entering the box number using the Numeric keys ( 0 - 9 ), press the [OK] key after entering the box number.
Enter the password, and press the [OK] key. NOTE

Enter the password used when the box was stored. (See Setting/ Storing the Box, on p. 6-46.) If a password is not stored, this operation is not required.
Press the [Initialize] key.
6-49
Press the [Yes] key. The box is initialized. NOTE

To cancel the initialization, press the [No] key.
6
6-50
Setting the Photo Mode of the Mail Box Function

You can select whether or not to use the Photo Mode in the Mail Box Function. When the Photo Mode is On, you can select the [Printed Img.] and [Photo] keys when scanning documents with the image quality setting. NOTE
1 2

key
6-51
Setting the Standard mode for Scanning

You can change the standard mode for when scanning originals into a box. You can also return the standard mode settings to their defaults. NOTE
The default settings are as follows: - Document Size: Auto - Record Size: Auto - Exposure/ Image quality: A
Storing the Standard Settings for Scanning

NOTE
To change the Standard Settings, Scan settings must already have been stored as the Standard Settings beforehand. (See Storing Originals in the Box, on p. 4-3.)
1 2

key
Standard Scan Settings
Press the [Yes] key. The settings currently displayed are stored. NOTE
The settings displayed here are the currently set scan settings. Press the [ ] or [ ] key to display the scan modes that do not t in the display area. To cancel storing the currently displayed settings as the Standard Settings, press the [No] key. The display returns to the screen in step 2.
6
6-52
Initializing the Standard mode for Scanning
1 2

key
Select the [Initialize] key. Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your Needs 6-53
Check the settings, and press the [Yes] key. The Standard Settings are initialized. NOTE
To cancel the initialization, press the [No] key. The display returns to the screen in step 2.
6
6-54
Setting Specications of the System Management ID (System Settings)

Setting/ Changing the System Manager ID and Password
You can set a password for the system manager. If the System Manager ID/ Password is set, restrictions can be placed on storing or changing the System Settings. IMPORTANT
When the Card Reader-C1 is attached, the System Manager ID and the System Password already stored, will be erased.
NOTE
When the Card Reader-C1 is attached, you cannot store the numbers from 1 to 1000 as the System Manager ID. For details on how to enter the characters, see Entering Characters on the Touch Panel Display, on p. 10-6. The maximum number of characters you can assign for a name, contact, and comment is 32, and for a E-mail address is 64. The maximum number of numbers you can store for the System Manager ID and Password is seven. If you store them with less than seven digits, the machine stores them as follows: - Example: When 321 is entered 0000321 is stored

System Settings
NOTE
When the System Manager ID/ Password is set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password after pressing the [System Settings] key. Then, press the ID key.
Press the [System Manager] key, then enter the name of the system manager. NOTE
To cancel storing, press the [Cancel] key.
Setting Specifications of the System Management ID (System Settings)
6-55
key
System Manager Settings
Press the [System Manager ID] key, and enter the number within seven digits with the Numeric keys ( 0 - 9 ) as the new System Manager ID. NOTE
You cannot store a System Manager ID with only the number 0, such as 0000000. You must set the System Manager ID. You can delete the number you entered by pressing the C key. To cancel storing, press the [Cancel] key.
Clear
Press the [System Password] key, and enter the number within seven digits with the Numeric keys ( 0 - 9 ) as the new System Password. Then press the [Next] key. NOTE
You cannot store a System Password with only the number 0, such as 0000000. Press the [Next] key when not setting the System Password. To erase the entered character (number), press the C key. To cancel storing, press the [Cancel] key.
Clear
Press the [E-mail Address] key, then enter email address of the system manager.
Press the [Contact Information] key, then enter where to contact the system manager.
6
6-56
Press the [Comment] key, then enter a comment for the system manager.
Once you have completed all settings, press the [OK] key.
6-57
Setting the Department ID Management

By storing a Department ID and Password for each department, you can set the machine so that its functions can be used only after the correct password has been entered. This is called Department ID Management. Department IDs and Passwords for up to 1000 departments can be stored. This function allows you to check the print totals for each department for management purposes. With Department ID Management, the following operations can be performed: Setting whether or not to set Department ID Management Storing the Department ID and the Password IMPORTANT
This function will switch to Card ID Management when the Card Reader-C1 (option) is attached, and will automatically manage the Department ID. When the Card Reader-C1 is attached, you do not need to store a password, but you can change the password.
NOTE
The default setting is Off. The maximum number of numbers you can store for the Department ID and Password is seven. If you store them with less than seven digits, the machine stores them as follows: - Example: When 321 is entered 0000321 is stored
Storing the Department ID, Password and Impression Limit


key
Department ID Manage-
NOTE
Select whether to use the Department ID Management function. When you select the [Off] key: Press the [OK] key, then press the [Done] key. The display returns to the Additional Functions screen. When you select [On] key: To store the Department ID and Password, press the [Store Dept. ID/ Password] key and proceed to step 3.
6
6-58
Press the [Department ID] key and enter the Department ID with the Numeric keys ( 0 9 ). NOTE
You cannot store a Department ID with only the number 0, such as 0000000.
Press the [Password] key and enter the password with the Numeric keys ( 0 - 9 ). NOTE
You cannot store a Password with only the number 0, such as 0000000. When a password is not stored, you can use this machine by entering only the Department ID.
Press the [Impression Limit] key and enter the impression limit with the Numeric keys ( 0 9 ). NOTE
Impression limits can be set from 0 to 999,999. Printing pages in excess of this limit is not permitted. Impression limits apply to the number of printed sides. Printing one sheet of paper on two sides is counted as two impressions.
6-59
Press the [OK] key.
After setting the printing restrictions, and press the [Done] key. NOTE
To apply printing restrictions, press the [Limit Impress.] key. The impression limits set in step 6 are enabled. To set the print restrictions, the Impression Limit needs to be specied in step 6. It is not possible to enable and disable Limit Impressions for individual departments.
Press the [OK] key. NOTE

When you select the [On] key, Department ID Management is enabled. (See Entering the Department ID and Password, on p. 10-4.)

Repeat this until the screen on the right appears. For details on how to enter the Department ID and Password, see Entering the Department ID and Password, on p. 10-4.
6
6-60
Changing the Password and Impression Limit

key
NOTE
When the System Manager ID/ Password is set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password after pressing the [System Settings] key. Then, press the ID key. Set the Control Card when the Card Reader-C1 (option) is attached before proceeding to step 1. (See Inserting the Control Card, on p. 10-2.)
Press the [On] key, and press the [Store Dept. ID/Password] key. NOTE
You do not need to operate the [On] [Off] key when the Card Reader-C1 is attached.
Use the [] and [] keys to display the Password you want to change. Then select the Password, and press the [Edit] key.
6-61
Press the [Store Dept. ID/ Password] key when the Card Reader-C1 is attached.
Press the [Password] key and enter the Password with the Numeric keys ( 0 - 9 ). NOTE
You cannot store a password with only the number 0, such as 0000000.
Press the [Impression Limit] key and enter the impression limit with the Numeric keys ( 0 9 ). Then press the [OK] key.
When the Card Reader-C1(option) is attached, you can display the number of restricted sides on the basic features screen by pressing Display Imp. Limit.
6
6-62

Press the [Done] key. Repeat this until the screen on the right appears. For details on how to enter the Department ID and Password, see Entering the Department ID and Password, on p. 10-4.
Erasing the Department ID and Password

IMPORTANT
You cannot erase the Department ID when the Card Reader-C1 is attached.

key
NOTE
Press the [On] key, and press the [Store Dept. ID/ Password] key.
6-63
Use the [] and [] keys to display the Department you want to erase. Then select the Department, and press the [Erase] key.
Press the [Yes] key. The Department ID and Password are erased. NOTE
To cancel erasing, press the [No] key.

6
6-64
Checking and Printing Counter Information

You can display and also print a list of the count of the paper that was used by each department.

key
NOTE Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your Needs

Select the [On] key, and press the [Print Totals] key. NOTE
Press the [Print Totals] key when the Card Reader-C1 is attached.
6-65
Check or print the count of print totals. The print total with the Department ID left blank (not displayed) is the total of prints from the driver not correspondent with a stored Department ID (unknown ID). When only checking the counter: Press the [] or [] key to display the desired Department, and check the print totals.
When printing the displayed list: Press the [Print List] key.
The screen shown at right appears. Press the [Yes] key. NOTE
If you do not want to print, press the [No] key.
The screen on the right appears during printing. NOTE

To cancel printing, press the [Cancel] key. To close the screen, press the [Done] key.
6
6-66

6-67
Erasing Print Totals

The following instructions describe how to delete the print totals made so far for all departments.

key
NOTE
Select the [On] key, and press the [Print Totals] key. NOTE
Press the [Print Totals] key when the Card Reader-C1 is attached.
When Calling Your Service Representative.
6
6-68
When Erasing by Department Select the Department you want to erase, then press the [Clear] key.
When Erasing All Counts Press the [Clear All Totals] key.
Select the [Yes] key. Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your Needs 6-69 NOTE
If you do not want to erase the counter, press the [No] key.
The message Erased. is displayed in the touch panel display for about two seconds.

6
6-70
Selecting whether or not to Accept Print Jobs of Unknown ID

You can set whether or not to print documents from a driver not correspondent with a stored Department ID. NOTE
The [Accept jobs with unknown ID] key is only displayed when the network printer function is enabled. The default setting is On.

key
NOTE
Select the [On] key. NOTE

When you select the [On] key, Department ID Management is enabled. (See Entering the Department ID and Password, on p. 10-4.) You do not need to operate the [On] [Off] key when the Card Reader-C1 is attached.
Select the [On] or [Off] key, and press the [OK] key. When you select the [On] key: Accepts print job from an unknown ID. When you select the [Off] key: Does not accept print job from an unknown ID.
6-71
Setting Device Information

You can set the name of this machine and the place where it is located.

key
Device Information Settings
NOTE Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your Needs

Press the [Device Name] and [Location] keys, then enter the name of this machine and the location where this machine is placed. Then press the [OK] key. NOTE
For details on how to enter the characters, see Entering Characters on the Touch Panel Display, on p. 10-6. The maximum number of character which can be entered is 32. To cancel storing, press the [Cancel] key.
6
6-72
Erasing a Message Board

A message board is used to display messages for the users of this machine. The messages are sent from the system manager using the utility software. You can erase a message displayed in the message board. NOTE
The message board is only displayed when the network printer function is enabled.

key
NOTE
Select the [Yes] or [No] key. When you select the [Yes] key: The message is not displayed. When you select the [No] key: The message remains displayed. Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your Needs 6-73
Setting the Auto Ofine On/Off

When the network is online, scanning is not possible with the Copy or Mail Box functions. By setting Auto Ofine is to "ON", the machine will automatically go Ofine. NOTE
Auto Ofine is only displayed when the Network Scan function is enabled. The default setting is "Off".

key
NOTE
Select the [On] or [Off] key, and press the [OK] key. NOTE
If Auto Ofine is set to ON, the machine automatically goes ofine with time set by Auto Clear. If Auto Clear Time is set to None (0), the machine will go Ofine after approximately 2 minutes.
6
6-74
Printing the Report

Printing the Contents of the Network Settings
NOTE
For details of the contents of the Users Data List, see the Network Guide. You can print the contents only when the network printer function is enabled.
1 2

key
Report Settings
Users Data List

When you do not want to print, press the [No] key.
The screen on the right appears during the report printing. NOTE
To cancel the report print, press the [Cancel] key. To close the screen, press the [Done] key.
Printing the Report
6-75
6-76
Printing the Report

This chapter describes how to load paper and add toner.
CH APTER
Loading Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Loading Paper in the Paper Drawers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Adjusting a Paper Drawer to Hold a Different Paper Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 Adding Toner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 Consumables and Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 Consumables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
7-1
Loading Paper
This section describes how to load paper in the paper drawers. IMPORTANT
When setting STMT-size paper, place it horizontally (STMTR).
NOTE
The following size paper can be loaded in the paper drawers: - Paper drawer 1, 2 : LTR - Paper drawer 3, 4 : 11"x17"/ LGL/ LTR/ LTRR/ STMTR For details of available paper stock which can be loaded in the paper drawers, see Available Paper Stock, on p. 1-17.
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawers

When the selected paper has run out, or the selected paper drawer runs out of paper during printing, the display prompting you to load paper appears.
CAUTION
When loading paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the paper.
IMPORTANT Loading Paper and Adding Toner

The message will also appear if the selected paper drawer is not fully inserted into the machine. Properly insert the paper drawer.
NOTE
You can check the amount of paper remaining in the paper drawer by looking at the remaining paper quantity display on the front of the paper drawer. If the above message appears during printing, the remaining prints will automatically be made after you load paper. When you select other feeding position, the remaining prints will be made after you press the [OK] key. To cancel printing, press the [Cancel] key.
7
7-2
Loading Paper
Press, then release the paper drawer release button of the paper drawer in which you want to load paper.
Grip the handle and pull out the paper drawer until it stops. NOTE Loading Paper and Adding Toner Loading Paper and Adding Toner 7-3
If the drawer seems to be stuck halfway, do not pull it out by force. Push it back into the copier, and then try pressing the release button and pulling it out again.
Open a package of paper, and remove the paper stack. IMPORTANT

Rewrap any remaining paper in its original package, and store it in a dry place away from direct sunlight. Do not copy on the following types of paper stock. Doing so may cause a paper jam. - Severely curled or wrinkled paper. - Transparencies. - Paper on which color images have been copied. - Paper which has been copied on using a digital full color copier (do not copy on the reverse side either). - Paper which has been printed on using a thermal transfer printer (do not copy on the reverse side either).
NOTE
Paper drawers 1 and 2 hold up to about 1,500 sheets of paper each (20-lb bond (80 g/m2)). Paper drawers 3 and 4 hold up to about 550 sheets of paper each (20-lb bond (80 g/m2)). For high-quality prints, we recommend using paper recommended by Canon.
4
Turn the paper stack over, and place it in the paper drawer. Even out the edges of the paper stack. Load the paper stack against the right wall of the paper drawer. IMPORTANT
If the paper is curled, curl it down before placing it in the paper drawer. Make sure that the height of the paper stack does not exceed the limit mark at the back of the paper drawer. Make sure that the paper size setting in the paper drawer matches the size of paper to be loaded.
NOTE
When loading paper in the paper drawer 3 for the rst time, set the size plate of the paper loaded in the paper drawer. For details of print direction of papers already printed with logos or patterns, see Relation of Original Orientation and Paper Orientation, on p. 11-9.
7
7-4
Loading Paper
Gently push the paper drawer back into the machine until it clicks.
CAUTION
When returning the paper drawer to its original position, be careful not to get your ngers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
IMPORTANT
Never place paper or any other items in the open part of the paper drawer next to the paper stack. Doing so may cause paper jams.
NOTE
When paper runs out during printing, load paper, and follow the instructions in the touch panel display. The machine automatically restarts the remaining print.
7-5
Adjusting a Paper Drawer to Hold a Different Paper Size

If you want to load a new paper size in a paper drawer, follow the procedure described below to adjust the paper drawer guides. You can adjust the paper drawers to hold the following standard paper size: 11"x17"/ LGL/ LTR/ LTRR/ STMTR. IMPORTANT
The paper size loaded in the paper drawer 3 can be changed. The paper sizes loaded in the paper drawer 4 can be changed by your service representative. For more details, contact your service representative. When setting STMT-size paper, place it horizontally (STMTR).
Squeeze the lever on the length guide as shown in the gure and slide the length guide to align it with the mark for the desired paper size.
Adjusting a Paper Drawer
Length guide When loading 11"x17"-size paper, slide the length guide all the way to the left, and drop it downward.
7
7-6
Loading Paper
Squeeze the lever on the width guide as shown in the illustration. Without releasing the lever, slide the width guide to align it with the mark for the desired paper size. IMPORTANT
If the length and width guides are not adjusted properly for the paper size loaded in the paper drawer, then the correct paper sizes might not appear in the display. Not adjusting the guides correctly might cause paper jams, dirty prints or make the inside of the machine dirty. To prevent these problems from occurring, make certain that the guides are adjusted correctly for the loaded paper size.
Width guide
Change the paper drawers size plate so that it matches the new paper size that you loaded.
7-7
Adding Toner
When there is only a small amount of toner remaining, the message to the right appears in the display. Prints can still be made, but at this time you should purchase new toner so that you have it on hand when it is needed.
WARNING
Never dispose of the waste toner in a re or incinerator. Doing so may result in an explosion.
NOTE
When this message appears, approximately 300 prints can still be made (LTR-size Canon Standard Chart). However, since this number may vary depending upon the original, it is recommended that the toner be added as soon as possible.
When the toner has run out and prints can no longer be made, the message describing how to add toner appears in the display. Add toner following the described procedure. IMPORTANT
The screen prompting you to add toner is displayed until you press the [Recover Later/Done] key. Use only the toner bottle recommended for use on this machine. Never add more than one bottle of toner. Add toner after the Add toner message is displayed.
NOTE
You can check how to add toner by pressing the [Previous] or [Next] key on the screen. If the toner runs out during a print job, the remaining prints will be made after you add toner.
7
7-8
Adding Toner
Open the toner supply cover.
Hold the toner bottle with both hands and turn it up and down a few times as shown in the illustration, to evenly distribute the toner inside the bottle.
The toner bottle is now locked onto the toner supply port.
Press down lightly on the toner bottle with one hand, and pull out the black shutter of the toner supply port as far as it will go.
7-9
Align the protrusions of the toner bottle with the slots on the toner supply port. Gently press the toner bottle down onto the toner supply port until you hear a click.
Grip the shutter of the toner bottle, and pull it out slowly until it stops. Toner ows into the toner box.
Lightly tap the top of the toner bottle to make sure that all of the toner empties into the toner box.
7
Push back the shutter of the toner bottle.
Make sure you hear a click when the black shutter of the toner supply port has been pushed back in as far as the position. When the toner bottle starts to come loose from the toner supply port, lightly hold it so that it does not fall over.
CAUTION
Never try to remove the toner bottle before you hear the click, doing so can damage the toner supply port.
7-10
Adding Toner
Remove the empty toner bottle from the toner supply port.
WARNING
Do not throw used toner bottles into open ames, as this may ignite the toner remaining inside the bottle and result in burns or a re.
CAUTION
When removing used toner bottles from the toner supply port, remove the bottles carefully to prevent toner from scattering and entering your eyes or mouth. If toner enters your eyes or mouth, wash immediately with cold water and consult a physician.
10 Close the toner supply cover.

NOTE
Press the [Recover Later/Done] key to close the screen prompting you to add toner.
11 Follow the instructions in the touch panel display.
7-11
Consumables and Options

The following consumables and accessories are available from Canon. For details, consult your service representative.
Consumables
Paper stock
In addition to plain paper (11"x17"/ LGL/ LTR/ STMT), transparencies, labels and other types of paper stock are available. For details, consult your service representative.
CAUTION
Do not store paper in places exposed to open ames, as this may cause the paper to ignite and result in burns or a re.
IMPORTANT
For high-quality print output, we recommend using paper recommended by Canon. To prevent moisture build-up, store any remaining paper tightly wrapped in its original package.
Black toner
Loading Paper and Adding Toner When the Add toner message appears in the touch panel display, add toner which has been approved for use with this machine. Only black toner can be used with this machine.
WARNING
Never dispose of waste toner in a re or incinerator. Doing so may result in an explosion.
CAUTION
Do not store toner bottles in places exposed to open ames, as this may cause the toner to ignite and result in burns or a re.
IMPORTANT
Store toner bottles in a cool location away from direct sunlight. (The recommended storage conditions: temperature below 86F, and humidity below 80%.)
7-12
Consumables and Options
Genuine supplies
Canon has developed and manufactured parts, supplies and GPR-4 Toner specically for use in this machine. As such, for superior print quality, we recommend that you use Canon-GENUINE brand parts, supplies and GPR-4 Toner in this machine. Ask your authorized Canon dealer or service provider for Canon-GENUINE brand parts, supplies and GPR-4 Toner.
We recommend that you order paper stock and toner from your service representative before they run out.
Options
Cassette
The paper drawer can be adjusted to hold the paper size you want to load. For instructions on how to adjust paper drawers for paper sizes, see Adjusting a Paper Drawer to Hold a Different Paper Size, on p. 7-6. You can adjust the paper drawer for the following paper sizes: 11"x17"/ LGL/ LTR/ LTRR/ STMTR. Loading Paper and Adding Toner Loading Paper and Adding Toner 7-13
Troubleshooting
CH APTER
This chapter describes what to do when there is a paper jam or a problem with print quality.
Removing Paper Jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 Display Indicating How to Clear the Jam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 Removing Paper Jams in the Main Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Removing Paper Jams in the Right Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 Removing Paper Jams in Paper Drawer 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 Removing Paper Jams in Paper Drawer 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15 Removing Paper Jams in Paper Drawer 3 or 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18 Removing Paper Jams in the Stack Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20 Removing Paper Jams in the Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22 Routine Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25 Cleaning the Platen Glass/ Rear Side of Platen Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25 Cleaning the Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26 Original Scanned Using the Feeder Becomes Dirty (Feeder Cleaning) . . . . . . . . . . 8-30 Output Sheets are Dirty (Wire Cleaning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31 Self-diagnostic (Error) Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32 If Memory Becomes Full During Scanning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35 When the Power does not Turn ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36 Service Call Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37 Troubleshooting 8-1
Removing Paper Jams

If a paper jam occurs, the following display appears in the touch panel display.
Display Indicating How to Clear the Jam

The display indicating the location of the paper jam appears in the touch panel display, followed by instructions on how to clear the paper jam. This display will repeatedly appear in the touch panel display until the paper jam is entirely cleared. Example of display indicating the location of the paper jam. When you select the [Recover Later] key: You can continue operations such as mode settings or scannings even when jammed paper is not removed. IMPORTANT
When a paper jam occurs in the feeder, you cannot continue the operation. Follow the directions in the display to remove the jammed paper.
Paper Jams
Example of display indicating how to clear the paper jam.
Troubleshooting
CAUTION
When removing jammed originals or paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the original or paper. When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do not allow necklaces, bracelets or other metal objects to touch the inside of the machine, as this may result in burns or electrical shock. When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, take care not to allow the toner on the jammed paper to come into contact with your hands or clothing, as this will dirty your hands or clothing. If they become dirty, wash them immediately with cold water. Washing with warm water will set the toner and make it impossible to remove the toner stains. When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, remove the jammed paper gently to prevent the toner on the paper from scattering and entering your eyes or mouth. If toner enters your eyes or mouth, wash immediately with cold water and consult a physician.
8
8-2
Removing Paper Jams
Inspect all areas which appear in the touch panel display, and remove any jammed paper. See the appropriate pages for instructions on how to nd and remove jammed paper. Display indicating locations of the paper jam and page number describing how to remove jammed paper. Feeder (See p. 8-22.) Exit slot Remove the protruding jammed paper. Paper drawer 1 (See p. 8-12.)
Stack bypass (See p. 8-20.) Right cover (See p. 8-10.) Main unit (See p. 8-5.) Paper drawer 3 or 4 (See p. 8-18.) Paper drawer 2 (See p. 8-15.) IMPORTANT
If a jammed paper tears while being removed, be sure to remove any remaining pieces from inside the machine.
If a paper jam occurs within the optional units, see the description on the pages for each option. Finisher-F1, Saddle Finisher-F2, Puncher Unit-B1 (See p. 9-13, p. 9-29.) Paper Deck-G1 (See p. 9-4.) Troubleshooting Copy Tray-C3 (See p. 9-35.) Removing Paper Jams 8-3
3 4
After you have removed all paper jams at the locations indicated in the touch panel display, restore all levers and covers to their original positions.
Continue operations following the instructions displayed in the touch panel display. If there is remaining paper to be removed: The display indicating how to clear the paper jam appears in the touch panel display. Repeat the procedure from step 1. NOTE
Once you have cleared the paper jam in locations other than the Feeder, print operation restarts.
8
8-4
Troubleshooting
Removing Paper Jams
Removing Paper Jams in the Main Unit

If a paper jam occurs in the main unit, a display similar to the one on the right appears in the touch panel display. Check where the jam occurred, and follow the procedure below and the procedure that appears in the touch panel display to remove the jammed paper.
Open the front cover of the main unit.
Move the green lever in the direction of the arrow.
Grip the lever and pull out the xing unit. The xing unit and duplexing unit are pulled out together.
Removing Paper Jams
8-5
Troubleshooting
Remove any remaining jammed paper from the xing unit.
Open the left cover.
Turn the green knob in the direction of the arrow, and remove any jammed paper.
CAUTION
Troubleshooting
The parts located around the cover are subject to high temperatures. When removing jammed paper, take care not to touch anything in this area except this cover.
Turn the duplexing unit knob in the direction of the arrow displayed on the screen, and remove any jammed paper.
8-6
Removing Paper Jams
Close the cover.
CAUTION
When closing the cover, be careful not to get your ngers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
Gently push the xing unit back into its original position.
CAUTION
When returning the xing unit to its original position, be careful not to get your ngers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
10 Return the green lever to its original position.
duplexing unit.
Removing Paper Jams
8-7
11 Remove any remaining jammed paper from the
Troubleshooting
12 Remove any jammed paper while opening the

left cover as shown in the illustration.
13 Remove any jammed paper while opening the

right cover as shown in the illustration.
14 Open the duplexing transport unit, and

remove any jammed papers.
Troubleshooting
15 Gently push the duplexing unit back to its

original position.
CAUTION
When returning the duplexing unit to its original position, be careful not to get your ngers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
8-8
Removing Paper Jams
16 Remove all jammed papers, and close the

front cover.
CAUTION

(See Display Indicating How to Clear the Jam, on p. 8-2.)
Removing Paper Jams
8-9
Troubleshooting
Removing Paper Jams in the Right Cover

If a paper jam occurs in the right cover, a display similar to the one on the right appears in the touch panel display. Check where the jam occurred, and follow the procedure below and the procedure that appears in the touch panel display to remove the jammed paper. NOTE
When the Paper Deck-G1 (option) is attached, move the paper deck away from the main unit. (See Paper Deck-G1, on p. 9-3.)
Open the right cover (upper) of the main unit.
Remove any jammed paper.
Troubleshooting
Close the right cover (upper).
CAUTION
8-10
Removing Paper Jams
Open the right cover (lower) of the main unit.
Close the right cover (lower).
CAUTION
Removing Paper Jams
8-11
Follow the instructions in the touch panel display.
Troubleshooting
Removing Paper Jams in Paper Drawer 1

If a paper jam occurs in paper drawer 1, a display similar to the one on the right appears in the touch panel display. Check where the jam occurred, and follow the procedure below and the procedure that appears in the touch panel display to remove the jammed paper. NOTE
Troubleshooting
Close the right cover (upper) of the main unit.
CAUTION
8-12
Removing Paper Jams
Press, then release the paper drawer release button of the paper drawer indicated on the touch panel display until the paper drawer comes out.
Pull out the paper drawer 1. NOTE

CAUTION
When returning the paper drawer to its original position, be careful not to catch your ngers between the edge of the paper drawer and the main unit.
Removing Paper Jams
8-13
Return the paper drawer to its original position.
Troubleshooting
Follow the instructions in the touch panel display. (See Display Indicating How to Clear the Jam, on p. 8-2.)
8
8-14
Troubleshooting
Removing Paper Jams
Removing Paper Jams in Paper Drawer 2

If a paper jam occurs in paper drawer 2, a display similar to the one on the right appears in the touch panel display. Check where the jam occurred, and follow the procedure below and the procedure that appears in the touch panel display to remove the jammed paper.
Open the front cover of the main unit.
Turn the green knob in the direction of the arrow so as to feed the jammed paper to the duplexing unit.
Gently pull out the duplexing unit.
Removing Paper Jams
8-15
Troubleshooting
Open the duplexing transport unit, and remove any jammed paper.
Gently push the duplexing unit back to its original position.
CAUTION
When returning the duplexing unit to its original position, be careful not to get your ngers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
Close the front cover of the main unit.
CAUTION
Troubleshooting
Press, then release the paper drawer release button of the paper drawer indicated on the touch panel display until the paper drawer comes out.
8
8-16
Removing Paper Jams
Pull out the paper drawer 2. NOTE

10 Return the paper drawer to its original position.
CAUTION
When returning the paper drawer to its original position, be careful not to catch your ngers between the edge of the paper drawer and the main unit.

Removing Paper Jams
8-17
Troubleshooting
Removing Paper Jams in Paper Drawer 3 or 4

If a paper jam occurs in paper drawer 3 or 4, a display similar to the one on the right appears in the touch panel display. Check where the jam occurred, and follow the procedure below and the procedure that appears in the touch panel display to remove the jammed paper.
Press, then release the paper drawer release button of the paper drawer indicated in the touch panel display until the paper drawer comes out.
Pull out the paper drawer. NOTE

Troubleshooting
8-18
Removing Paper Jams
Return the paper drawer to its original position.
CAUTION
When returning the paper drawer to the original position, be careful not to catch your ngers between the top of the paper drawer and the main unit.
Removing Paper Jams
8-19
Troubleshooting
Removing Paper Jams in the Stack Bypass

If a paper jam occurs in the stack bypass, a display similar to the one on the right appears in the touch panel display. Check where the jam occurred, and follow the procedure below and the procedure that appears in the touch panel display to remove the jammed paper. NOTE
Remove all paper from the stack bypass.
Troubleshooting
8-20
Removing Paper Jams
Close the right cover (upper).
CAUTION
Removing Paper Jams
8-21
Troubleshooting
Removing Paper Jams in the Feeder

If a paper jam occurs in the feeder, a display similar to the one on the right appears in the touch panel display. Check where the jam occurred, and follow the procedure below and the procedure that appears in the touch panel display to remove the jammed paper.
Open the upper cover of the feeder.
Remove any jammed original.
Troubleshooting
Open the middle cover holding the knob in the back.
8-22
Removing Paper Jams
Remove the jammed original.
Close the middle cover.
CAUTION
Turn the knob in the direction of the arrow, then remove the jammed original.
CAUTION
Removing Paper Jams
8-23
Once you have removed the entire jammed original, close the upper cover of the feeder.
Troubleshooting
Open the feeder, and remove any jammed paper.
Close the feeder.

8
8-24
Troubleshooting
Removing Paper Jams
Routine Cleaning
If the original is not scanned clearly, clean the following parts. For high-quality outputs, we recommend cleaning them once or twice a month. Platen glass Rear side of platen glass Feeder Scanning area White plate, Roller
WARNING
When cleaning the machine, rst turn OFF the main power switch and unplug the power plug. Failure to observe these items may result in a re or electrical shock. Do not use alcohol, benzene, paint thinner or other solvents for cleaning. Doing so might result in plastic parts becoming deformed.
CAUTION
Unplug the power plug from the outlet at least once a year, and clean the area around the base of the plugs metal pins to ensure all dust is removed. If dust accumulates in this area, it may result in a re. Do not dampen the cloth too much, as this may damage the original or break the machine.
Cleaning the Platen Glass/ Rear Side of Platen Glass

Clean the platen glass or the rear side of platen glass following the procedure below. IMPORTANT
If the platen glass or the rear side of platen glass is dirty, the original may not be scanned cleanly, or the size of the original may be detected incorrectly.
Clean the platen glass with a cloth dampened with water, then wipe with a dry cloth.
Routine Cleaning
8-25
Troubleshooting
Cleaning the Platen Glass
Cleaning the Rear Side of Platen Glass

Clean the rear side of platen glass with a cloth dampened with water, then wipe with a dry cloth.
Cleaning the Feeder

Clean the feeder scanning area, white plate, and roller following the procedure below. IMPORTANT
If the feeder scanning area is dirty, it may result in a paper jam or dirty print output. Spin the roller while cleaning it.
Open the feeder cover.
Troubleshooting
Clean the roller (total of 8 places) at the rear side of the feeder cover with a cloth dampened with water, then wipe with a dry cloth.
8-26
Routine Cleaning
Clean the roller (total of 3 places) as shown in the illustration with a cloth dampened with water, then wipe with a dry cloth.
Open the middle cover holding the knob in the back.
Clean the roller (total of 5 places) with a cloth dampened with water, then wipe with a dry cloth.
Routine Cleaning
8-27
Clean the roller (total of 4 places) with a cloth dampened with water, then wipe with a dry cloth.
Troubleshooting
Close the middle cover.
CAUTION
Close the feeder cover.
CAUTION
Open the feeder.
Troubleshooting
10 Clean the feeder scanning area with a cloth

dampened with water, then wipe with a dry cloth.
8-28
Routine Cleaning
11 Clean the white plate with a cloth dampened

with water, then wipe with a dry cloth. IMPORTANT
Do not push the white plate hard since the white plate is soft.
12 Close the feeder.
Routine Cleaning
8-29
Troubleshooting
Original Scanned Using the Feeder Becomes Dirty (Feeder Cleaning)

If your originals have black streaks or appear dirty after feeding them in the feeder caused by the pencil powder etc. on the roller, perform the Feeder Cleaning. Cleaning is done by repeatedly feeding blank papers though the feeder. NOTE
The Adjustment/Cleaning screen is made up of several screens. Use the [ ] and [ ] keys to scroll to the desired screen and make the required settings. When the [ ] or [ ] key should be pressed, the indication is displayed in this manual. It takes about 10 seconds to clean the feeder.
1 2

key
Feeder Cleaning
Place 10 blank LTR-size paper in the feeder, then press the [Start] key. NOTE
To cancel Feeder Cleaning, press the [Cancel] key.
Troubleshooting
When the feeder is being cleaned, the message on the right appears in the touch panel display.
8-30
Routine Cleaning
Output Sheets are Dirty (Wire Cleaning)

If dirt appears on printed paper, clean the wire of the corona assemblies as the need arises. NOTE
It takes about 30 seconds to clean the wire.
1 2

key
Wire Cleaning
Press the [Start] key. NOTE

To cancel Wire Cleaning, press the [Cancel] key.
While wire cleaning is being performed, the message to the right appears in the touch panel display.
Routine Cleaning
8-31
Troubleshooting
Self-diagnostic (Error) Display

Self-diagnostic (error) messages appear in the touch panel display at the following times: When printing cannot be performed because of an operational error. When you need to make a judgment or take some action during scanning or printing. If a self-diagnostic message appears, follow the instructions in the touch panel display.
Message/ Cause
Add paper.
The machine has run out of paper. No more prints can be made. The paper drawer is not correctly inserted.
Remedy
Load paper. (See Loading Paper, on p. 7-2.) Insert the paper drawer as far as it will go. (See Loading Paper, on p. 7-2.)
Load LTR-size paper.

The paper drawer loaded with the best paper size selected by the Automatic Paper selection is not inserted into the machine. Load the indicated paper size in a paper drawer. If you press the key while this message is displayed, print will be made with the currently selected paper size.
Start
Troubleshooting
If the message remains even when the indicated paper is loaded, set the Drawer Eligibility of that paper drawer to On . (See Setting a Paper Drawer for Auto Paper Selection/Auto Drawer Switching, on p. 6-10.)
Return page 1 to the top, and then press the Start key.
Scanning was stopped due to a problem with the Feeder. Arrange the originals in page order with the first page on top. Place the originals back in the Feeder original supply tray, then press the key.
Start
8-32
Message/ Cause
Remove the paper from the output tray.
Prints from the previous job remain in the output tray.
Remedy
Remove the prints from the output tray, then press the key.
Start
Attach the finisher to the main unit.

The Finisher is not properly connected to the main unit. Connect the Finisher to the main unit properly.
Paper is jammed in the indicated location. Remove the jammed paper.

An original jam or paper jam has occurred, preventing you from making prints. Remove paper from the machine following the guidance messages in the touch panel display. (See Removing Paper Jams, on p. 8-2.)
Add toner.
There is not enough toner to print. Add toner using the toner bottle recommended for use on this machine. (See Adding Toner, on p. 7-8.)
8-33
Troubleshooting
Message/ Cause
Place the original on the platen glass.
There is no original on the platen glass. The programed function (mode) requires the original to be placed in the feeder.
Remedy
Place the originals on the platen glass.
Remove the original from the platen glass.

The original remains on the platen glass. Remove the original from the platen glass, then place the original again.
Remove the original from the feeder.

Original is placed both in the feeder and on the platen glass with the mode which the original cannot be placed in the feeder set. Remove the original from the feeder.
8
8-34
Troubleshooting
If Memory Becomes Full During Scanning

If memory becomes full during scanning of originals, the following messages appear on the touchpanel display. NOTE
The machines memory can hold about 3,700 originals (LTR-size Canon Standard Chart, Standard setting) scanned in standard mode.
If the message asking whether to print the original pages scanned into memory appears, select the [Yes] or [No] key as appropriate. When you select the [Yes] key: Pages in memory are printed, and remaining originals are then scanned. When you select the [No] key: Pages in memory are not printed. When processing is completed, the display returns to the Basic Features screen.
If the screen displayed on the right appears, press the [Cancel] key to return to the Basic Features screen.
If Memory Becomes Full During Scanning
8-35
Troubleshooting
When the Power does not Turn ON

If the main power indicator on the control panel does not light even though the main power switch and control panel switch are both ON, be sure to check the breaker on the main unit to see if it is OFF. If the breaker has gone OFF, do not turn it ON. Instead, contact your service representative.
WARNING
If the breaker is OFF position, do not switch the current leakage breaker back ON. Doing so may lead to a re, electrical shock, smoke, or the tripping of other breakers in the facility.
(I Side)
Side)
8
8-36
Troubleshooting
When the Power does not Turn ON
Service Call Message

If a malfunction occurs and the machine will not operate as normal, the message on the right (the service call message) will appear in the touch panel display.
If this message appears, follow the procedure described below.
WARNING
Do not insert or unplug the power plug with wet hands, as this may result in electrical shock.
CAUTION
Always grasp the plug portion when unplugging the power cord. Pulling on the power cord may expose or snap the core wire, or otherwise damage the power cord. If the cord is damaged, this could cause an electricity leak and result in a re or electrical shock.
IMPORTANT
If you turn the main power switch OFF when there is a reserved print job, that job will be erased.
Turn the main power switch OFF. Allow at least 10 seconds before turning the main power switch back ON. Troubleshooting Service Call Message 8-37
If the machine still does not operate normally, carry out the following procedure, then contact your service representative: Turn the main power switch OFF.
Unplug the power cable from the outlet.
8
8-38
Troubleshooting
Service Call Message
Handling Options
CH APTER
This chapter describes the use of options and what to do if there is a paper jam in an optional unit. Handling Options 9-1
System Conguration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Paper Deck-G1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Parts and Their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Removing Paper Jams in the Paper Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Loading Paper in the Paper Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Finisher-F1/ Saddle Finisher-F2/ Puncher Unit-B1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Parts and Their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Collate Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Group Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Offset Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Staple Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Saddle Stitching Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11 Punch Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12 Removing Paper Jams in the Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13 Replacing the Staple Case in the Stapler Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15 Removing Jammed Staples from the Stapler Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18 Removing Paper Jams in the Saddle Stitcher Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21 Replacing the Saddle Stitcher Unit Staple Cartridge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24 Removing Jammed Staples from the Saddle Stitcher Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26 Removing Paper Jams in the Puncher Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29 Removing Punch Waste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32 Consumables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33 Copy Tray-C3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34 Parts and Their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34 Removing Paper Jams in the Copy Tray-C3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
System Conguration
The following options can be attached to the machine. NOTE
Before using the touch panel, peel off the protective lm from the display.
Handling Options
Saddle Finisher-F2 Control Card IVN
Main Unit
Card Reader-C1
Paper Deck-G1
Finisher-F1
Copy Tray-C3
Puncher Unit-B1
9-2
System Configuration
Paper Deck-G1
If you attach the Paper Deck-G1 to the machine, one extra size of paper can be used in addition to the paper sizes in the paper drawers of the main unit. Up to 3,500 sheets (20-lb bond (80 g/m2)) of paper can be loaded in the paper deck. Handling Options IMPORTANT
When the machine is in the Low-Power mode (the touch panel is not displayed, and only the key and the Main Power indicator are lit), you may not be able to open the paper deck. In this case, press the Energy Saver key beforehand to reactivate the machine, then press the Open button.
Energy Saver
NOTE
Paper size of the Paper Deck is xed to LTR.

Release Lever
Press to remove the Paper Deck from the Main Unit.
Open button
Press to load paper or to check for a paper jam.
Paper Supply indicator

Enables you to check the amount of paper remaining in the Paper Deck.
Paper Deck
Max. 3,500 sheets (20-lb bond (80 g/m2)) can be stacked.
Paper Deck-G1
9-3
Removing Paper Jams in the Paper Deck

If a paper jam occurs in the Paper Deck-G1, a display similar to the one on the right appears in the touch panel display. Check where the jam occurred, and follow the procedure below and the procedure that appears in the touch panel display to remove the jammed paper. Handling Options
CAUTION
Press the release lever to remove the Paper Deck from the main unit.
9-4
Paper Deck-G1
Press the Open button to open the Paper Deck. IMPORTANT

When the machine is in the Low-Power mode (the Energy Saver touch panel is not displayed, and only the key and the Main Power indicator are lit), you may not be able to open the paper deck. In this case, Energy Saver press the key beforehand to reactivate the machine, then press the Open button.
Close the Paper Deck and reconnect it to the main unit.
CAUTION
When reconnecting the Paper Deck to the main unit, be careful not to get your ngers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
Paper Deck-G1
9-5
Handling Options
Loading Paper in the Paper Deck
1
Handling Options
Press the Open button to open the Paper Deck. IMPORTANT

When the machine is in the Low-Power mode (the Energy Saver touch panel is not displayed, and only the key and the Main Power indicator are lit), you may not be able to open the paper deck. In this case, Energy Saver press the key beforehand to reactivate the machine, then press the Open button.
Open a package of paper, and remove the paper stack (Make sure that the seam on the center of the package is face up).
CAUTION
When loading paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the paper.
IMPORTANT
Rewrap any remaining paper in its original package, and store it in a dry place away from direct sunlight. Do not copy on the following types of paper stock. Doing so may cause a paper jam. - Severely curled or wrinkled paper. - Transparencies. - Paper which has been copied on using a digital full color copier (do not copy on the reverse side either). - Paper which has been printed on using a thermal transfer printer (do not copy on the reverse side either).
NOTE
The Paper Deck holds up to about 3,500 sheets of paper (20-lb bond (80 g/m2)). For high-quality prints, we recommend using paper recommended by Canon.
9-6
Paper Deck-G1
Place it in the paper deck. IMPORTANT

If the paper is curled, curl it down before placing it in the paper drawer. Make sure that the height of the paper stack does not exceed the limit mark at the back of the paper drawer.
Close the Paper Deck.
CAUTION
When returning the Paper Deck to its original position, be careful not to get your ngers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
NOTE
For details of print direction of paper already printed with logos or patterns, see Relation of Original Orientation and Paper Orientation, on p. 11-9.
Paper Deck-G1
9-7
Handling Options
Finisher-F1/ Saddle Finisher-F2/ Puncher Unit-B1

Upper cover
Handling Options
Open to removed jamed paper. (See Removing Paper Jams in the Finisher, on p. 9-13.)
Top cover of the puncher unit

Open this cover when a paper jam occurs in the puncher unit. (See Removing Paper Jams in the Puncher Unit, on p. 9-29.)
Tray A Output Tray

Papers are output to these trays. You can assign the trays so that the output of a specied function is output to a designated tray.
Front cover of the puncher unit

Open this cover when a paper jam occurs in the puncher unit, or when removing the punch waste. (See Removing Paper Jams in the Puncher Unit, on p. 9-29, Removing Punch Waste, on p. 9-32.)
Tray B
Front cover (upper)

Open this cover to replace the staple case in the staple unit, or when a staple jam occurs. (See Replacing the Staple Case in the Stapler Unit, on p. 9-15, Removing Jammed Staples from the Stapler Unit, on p. 9-18.)
Front cover (lower)

Open this cover when a paper jam or staple jam occurs in the saddle stitcher unit, or when replacing the saddle stitcher unit staple cartridge. (See Removing Paper Jams in the Saddle Stitcher Unit, on p. 9-21, Replacing the Saddle Stitcher Unit Staple Cartridge, on p. 9-24, and Removing Jammed Staples from the Saddle Stitcher Unit, on p. 9-26.) * Only available in the Saddle Finisher-F2.
Finisher-F1 Saddle Finisher-F2 Puncher Unit-B1
Booklet tray
The paper that is folded and stapled at the center to form a booklet is delivered to this tray. * Only available in the Saddle FinisherF2.
*This illustration shows the Saddle Finisher-F2 with the Puncher Unit-B1 attached to it. * In the description on the following pages Finisher-F1 and Saddle Finisher-F2 are referred to collectively as Finisher unless otherwise stated.
9-8
Collate Mode
This function automatically collates print sets into page order before they are delivered.
Group Mode
Handling Options This function outputs all prints of the same page in one set and slightly shifts the output position of print sets to make them easier to handle. NOTE
When the Collate or Group mode is set, the tray moves down when each set of paper is delivered. When the delivered paper reaches the stacking limit of the tray, the paper is automatically delivered to another acceptable tray. When the paper reaches the stacking limit of all of the acceptable trays, printing stops temporarily. After you remove the delivered paper from the tray, the tray moves up the corresponding distance and printing of the remaining sets restarts.
Offset Mode
This function outputs papers shifted to the front. IMPORTANT
You cannot set the Offset mode when printing on STMTR-size paper.
NOTE
These functions shift each set of output paper about 1-1/4" (30 mm) before delivery, when the Collate function or Group function has been set, and copies are made or prints output from a computer.
Staple Mode
This function automatically collates print sets into page order, staples the sets, and outputs them.
CAUTION
Do not put your hand in the trays stapling area when the machine is equipped with the Finisher. Doing so may result in injury.
IMPORTANT
The tray moves down when each set of paper is delivered. When the delivered paper reaches the stacking limit of the tray, the printing stops temporarily. Remove all the paper on the tray, and the remaining printing and stapling will restart.
NOTE
If the number of sheets in one set exceeds 30 (for 11"x17"/ LGL/ LTRR size) or 50 (for LTR size), stapling will not be performed. Only the Collating will be performed. If the machine stops during stapling and a message is displayed, it means that almost all of the staples have been used up and the staple cartridge must be replaced. Replace the staple cartridge in this case. (See Replacing the Staple Case in the Stapler Unit, on p. 9-15.)
9-9
Copies are stapled at the following places. When an original is placed on the platen glass:
Corner staple area

CBA
Double staple area

Upper left Upper right
CBA
Handling Options
Left side Right side
Lower right Lower left
Upper left
CBA
CBA
Upper right Left side Lower right Lower left Right side
When originals are placed in the Feeder:
Corner staple area
Double staple area
ABC
Upper right Upper left Lower left Lower right
ABC
Right side Left side
ABC
Upper right Upper left Lower left Lower right
ABC
Right side Left side
IMPORTANT
You cannot set the Staple mode when printing on transparencies, tracing papers, and labels. You cannot corner-staple STMTR-size paper. You cannot double-staple LGL/ LTRR/ STMTR-size paper.
9-10
Saddle Stitching Mode

This function enables you to make booklets consisting of pages folded and stapled at the center. Originals Copy Saddle stitch The pages are folded with a roller to form a booklet.
1 2 3 4
2
8
5
8
4
1
6 3
5 6 7 8
IMPORTANT
This function is only available with the Saddle Finisher-F2. The maximum number of sheets that can be bound is 15 (60 pages). The paper sizes that can be saddle stitched are 11"x17" and LTRR.
9-11
Handling Options
Punch Mode
This function punches holes (2 or 3 holes) in the printed sheets. The hole punched area is as shown in the illustration.
Platen glass
Feeder
Handling Options
CBA
Hole punched area
ABC
Hole punched area
CBA
Hole punched area
ABC
Hole punched area
IMPORTANT
The machine automatically selects the type of hole punch (2 or 3 holes) depending on the selected paper size. - 2 holes: LGL/ LTRR - 3 holes: 11"x17"/ LTR Holes cannot be punched in transparencies, tracing papers labels and 3-hole punch. You cannot punch holes in STMTR-size paper.
NOTE
This function is only available when the Finisher is equipped with the Puncher Unit-B1.
The distance between the punch holes is as shown in the illustration.
4-1/4" 4-1/4" (108 mm) (108 mm)
2-3/4" (70 mm)
3 holes
2 holes
9-12
Removing Paper Jams in the Finisher

If a paper jam occurs using the Finisher, a display similar to the one on the right appears in the touch panel display. Check where the jam occurred, and follow the procedure below and the procedure that appears in the touch panel display to remove the jammed paper. Handling Options Finisher-F1/ Saddle Finisher-F2/ Puncher Unit-B1 9-13
CAUTION
Remove any paper protruding from the output tray. IMPORTANT

When making prints with the Staple mode, do not remove the output sheets not yet stapled. (Stapling will be performed after removing the jammed paper.)
Open the top cover and check the inside of the Finisher.
Lift cover 1 upward, and remove any jammed paper. Then, return cover 1 to its original position.
CAUTION
Handling Options
Lift cover 2 upward, and remove any jammed paper. NOTE

When you pull up cover 2, cover 1 is pulled up together with it.
Return cover 2, and close the top cover.
CAUTION
9-14
Replacing the Staple Case in the Stapler Unit

When the Finisher runs out of staples, the staple case must be replaced. The message on the right will appear in the touch panel display. Follow the procedure described below to replace the staple case. Handling Options 9-15
Push down the green lever. The staple cartridge will slightly come out.
Pull out the protruding staple cartridge holding it by its left and right sides.
Open the front cover (upper) of the Finisher
Pull out the empty staple case holding it by its left and right sides. NOTE
Place the staple cartridge as shown in the illustration, then pull out the staple case.
Handling Options
Insert the new staple case. NOTE

Only one staple case can be inserted at a time. Use only the special staple case for use on this machine.
Remove the seal xing the staples by pulling it straight out.
Gently push the staple cartridge back into the Finisher until the green lever returns to its original position.
9-16
Make sure that the staple cartridge is rmly secured, then close the front cover (upper) of the Finisher.
CAUTION
Handling Options 9-17
NOTE
When you close the cover, the staple unit automatically performs a dry stapling operation several times to reposition the staples.
Removing Jammed Staples from the Stapler Unit

If a staple jam occurs, the screen on the right appears. Follow the procedure described below to remove any jammed staples.
Handling Options
Open the front cover (upper) of the Finisher.
Push down the green lever. The staple cartridge will slightly come out.
Pull out the protruding staple cartridge holding it by its left and right sides.
9-18
Lower the knob of the staple cartridge.
Return the knob of the staple cartridge to its original position.
Gently push the staple cartridge back into the Finisher until the green lever returns to its original position.
9-19
Remove all of the staples that slide from the staple case.
Handling Options
Make sure that the staple cartridge is rmly secured, then close the front cover (upper) of the Finisher.
CAUTION
Handling Options
NOTE
When you close the cover, the staple unit automatically performs a dry stapling operation several times to reposition the staples.
9
9-20
Removing Paper Jams in the Saddle Stitcher Unit

If a paper jam occurs when the booklet mode was set using Saddle Finisher-F2, the screen shown at right appears. Remove the jammed paper according to the instructions on the screen. NOTE
This procedure is only required when Saddle Finisher-F2 is attached.
CAUTION
Move the Saddle Finisher-F2 away from the main unit, holding the section indicated in the gure on the right.
Remove the paper in the stack.
9-21
Handling Options
Connect the Saddle Finisher-F2 to the main unit.
CAUTION
When returning the Finisher to its original position, be careful not to catch your ngers between the edge of the Finisher and the main unit.
Handling Options
Open the front cover (lower) of the Finisher.
Turn the knob on the right.
Turn the knob on the left while pressing it.
9-22
Close the front cover (lower) of the Finisher.
CAUTION
9-23
Handling Options
Replacing the Saddle Stitcher Unit Staple Cartridge

When the Finisher runs out of staples, the staple cartridge must be replaced. The screen on the right will appear in the touch panel display. Follow the procedure described below to replace the staple cartridge. Handling Options NOTE
This procedure is only required when the Saddle Finisher-F2 is attached.
Pull out the saddle stitcher unit.
Pull the stapler unit of the saddle stitcher unit, then push it up.
9-24
Pull out the empty staple cartridge holding it by its left and right sides.
Insert the new staple cartridge. IMPORTANT

Replace both the inner and outer staple cartridges at the same time.
Pull the stapler unit of the saddle stitcher unit, then return it to its original position.
Push back the saddle stitcher unit, then close the front cover (lower).
CAUTION
IMPORTANT
Once you have removed the jammed staples, be sure to reposition staples for the saddle stitcher unit. (See Staple Repositioning for Saddle Finisher, on p. 6-32.)
9-25
Handling Options
Removing Jammed Staples from the Saddle Stitcher Unit

If a staple jam occurs, the screen on the right appears. Follow the procedure described below to remove any jammed staples. NOTE Handling Options
This procedure is only required when the Saddle Finisher-F2 is attached.
Pull out the saddle stitcher unit.
Pull the stapler unit of the saddle stitcher unit, then push it up.
9-26
Grasp the left and right ends of the staple cartridge, and remove the cartridge.
Push down part A, then pull up knob B.
B A
Remove the jammed staples, then return knob B to its original position.
Return the staple cartridge to its original position.
9-27
Handling Options
Pull the stapler unit of the saddle stitcher unit, then return it to its original position.
Handling Options
Push back the saddle stitcher unit, then close the front cover (lower).
CAUTION
IMPORTANT
Once you have removed the jammed staples, be sure to reposition staples for the saddle stitcher unit. (See Staple Repositioning for Saddle Finisher, on p. 6-32.)
9-28
Removing Paper Jams in the Puncher Unit

When paper jams occur while the punch function is being used, the screen on the right is displayed. In addition to removing the paper jam in the main unit, also check the puncher unit with the following procedure and remove any jammed paper. Handling Options 9-29 NOTE
This procedure is only required when the Puncher Unit-B1 is attached.
CAUTION
Open the front cover of the puncher unit.
Align the of the knob to the range of
Close the front cover of the puncher unit.
CAUTION
Handling Options
Open the top cover of the puncher unit.
Close the top cover of the puncher unit.
CAUTION
9-30
9-31
Handling Options
Removing Punch Waste

When the punch waste tray becomes full with debris, the screen on the right appear in the display. Follow the procedure described below to remove the punch waste. NOTE Handling Options
This procedure is only required when the Puncher Unit-B1 is attached.
Open the front cover of the puncher unit.
Pull out the punch waste tray.
Discard the punch waste.
9-32
Return the punch waste tray to its original position. NOTE

If the tray is not returned securely in place, you cannot make prints with the Punch mode selected.
Close the front cover of the puncher unit.
CAUTION
Consumables
Staple cartridge
Use only the staple cartridges recommended for use on this machine. There is a space behind the front cover (upper) for storing staple cartridges (equivalent to the space occupied by three staple unit staple cartridges). We recommend that you order staple cartridges from your service representative before they run out.
9-33
Handling Options
Copy Tray-C3
The Copy Tray-C3 is equipped with the following functions: Collate Group Rotate Handling Options IMPORTANT
The paper size which can be selected when you set the Rotate mode are LTR/ LTRR.
Copy Tray-C3
Papers are output here.
NOTE
Adjust the auxiliary tray depending on the print paper size.
9-34
Copy Tray-C3
Removing Paper Jams in the Copy Tray-C3

If a paper jam occurs in the Copy Tray-C3, a display similar to the one on the right appears in the touch panel display. Check where the jam occurred, and follow the procedure below and the procedure that appears in the touch panel display to remove the jammed paper. Handling Options Copy Tray-C3 9-35
CAUTION
Pull out the protruding paper from the exit slot.
10
10-2 10-2 10-3 10-3
CH APTER
This chapter describes operations when user restrictions are enabled, the character entry method, etc. Operation When User Restrictions are Enabled and How to Enter Alphabet Characters 10-1
Operation When User Restrictions Are Enabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inserting the Control Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operations before Using Copy or Mail Box Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operations after Using Copy or Mail Box Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering the Department ID and Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Operations after Turning the Power ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Operations after Using Copy Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5 Entering Characters on the Touch Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 Entering Alphabet Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 Entering Special Letters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 Setting in Inches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
10
Operation When User Restrictions Are Enabled

Inserting the Control Card
When the Control Card IVN or Card Reader-C1 (option) is attached to the machine, you must insert the control card before operating this machine. IMPORTANT
When the Basic Features screen does not appear in the touch panel display even if the control card is inserted, check the followings: - Make sure that the control card is inserted in the correct direction. - Make sure that the control card is inserted as far as it can go. - Make sure that an unusable control card is not inserted.
NOTE
For details on how to handle the Control Card IVN, see the Control Card Instruction Manual. For details on how to change the password and how to check, print, and erase the counting information with Card Reader-C1, see Setting the Department ID Management, on p. 6-58. When the Card Reader-C1 is attached, you can use the following two cards: The optical type card can manage up to 200 departments, and the magnetic type card can manage up to 3000 departments. The maximum number of departments that can be managed, depends on the main unit. The imageRUNNER 5000 can manage up to 1000 departments.
CONTROL CARD III

Card Reader-C1
CONTROL CARD
123
123
001
Magnetic type card
Optical type Card
10
10-2
Operations before Using Copy or Mail Box Functions

NOTE
For details on how to turn the power ON, see Main Power and Control Panel Power, on p. 1-6.
Insert the control card into the card slot making sure it is facing the correct direction. IMPORTANT Operation When User Restrictions are Enabled and How to Enter Alphabet Characters 10-3
When the Control Card IVN is attached, check if there is a reserved copy job in the System Monitor screen. If you remove the control card, the reserved copy job will be canceled. When you reserve or interrupt a job with Control Card IVN attached, do not remove the control card. If you remove the control card, the reserved copy job will be canceled.
Control Card
The basic screen of the selected function is displayed.
Operations after Using Copy or Mail Box Functions

After you nish using this machine, remove the control card. The touch panel display returns to the screen for inserting the control card. IMPORTANT
After a control card is removed, it must be inserted again before operating the machine. If you reserved a job with Control Card IVN attached, do not remove the control card until that job is completed. When using the control card, we recommend checking if there is a reserved copy job in the System Monitor screen.
10
Entering the Department ID and Password

When Department ID Management has been set, the Department ID and Password must be entered before operating this machine. NOTE
When you are using the control card, the message You must insert a control card. appears in the touch panel display. Insert the control card into the card slot. (See Inserting the Control Card, on p. 10-2.)
Operations after Turning the Power ON

NOTE
For details on how to turn the power ON, see Main Power and Control Panel Power, on p. 1-6.
Press the [Department ID] key, and enter the Department ID with the Numeric keys ( 0 - 9 ). NOTE
If you make a mistake when entering values, press the C key, and enter the values again.
Clear
10
Press the [Password] key, and enter the password with the Numeric keys ( 0 - 9 ). NOTE
If you make a mistake when entering the password, press the C key, and enter the password again. If a password has not been set, proceed to step 3.
Clear
10-4
Press the
ID
key.
Reset
1
Guide
2 5 8 0
3 6 9
Clear
?
4 7
Interrupt
ID
The basic screen of the selected function is displayed. NOTE

If the Department ID and/or Password that you entered are wrong, the message Wrong ID or password appears. Repeat the procedure from step 1.
Operations after Using Copy Functions

When operating is completed, press the key on the control panel.
ID
Reset
1
Guide
2 5 8 0
3 6 9
Clear
The screen for entering the Department ID and Password appears. To operate again, enter the Department ID and Password again. IMPORTANT
If you do not press the ID key after nishing your operation, any subsequent copies will be totaled under the same Department ID which you previously entered.
?
4 7
Interrupt
ID
NOTE
When operating is completed, the screen for entering the Password automatically appears after the set time has elapsed if you forget to press the ID key. (See Auto Clear Function, on p. 48.)
10-5
10
Entering Characters on the Touch Panel Display

At screens which require alphanumeric entry, enter characters using the alphabet keys displayed in the touch panel display as described below.
Entering Alphabet Characters

Example: Enter canon. Operation When User Restrictions are Enabled and How to Enter Alphabet Characters
Press the [Entry Mode] key, and select Alphabet. NOTE

Each press of the [Entry Mode] key switches the entry mode. If you press the [Uppercase] key, the entry mode changes to the upper case mode, and upper case characters can be entered.
Enter canon. NOTE

The available modes and maximum number of letters vary depending on the purpose. To enter a space, press the [Space] key. To move the cursor, press the [ ] or [ ] key. If you make a mistake when entering characters, use the [ ] or [ ] key and the [Backspace] key to delete the character. Then, enter the correct character. You can also delete all characters you have entered by pressing the C key. To continue entering special letters, press the [Entry Mode] key to select the desired mode. Then, enter the character.
Clear
10
When you have entered all characters, press the [OK] key.
10-6
Entering Special Letters

Example: Enter .
Press the [Entry Mode] key, and select Other. NOTE

Each press of the [Entry Mode] key switches the entry mode.
Press the [] or [] key to display the desired special letter. Press the desired special letter in the touch panel display. NOTE
The available modes and maximum number of letters vary depending on the purpose. To enter a space, press the [Space] key. To move the cursor, press the [ ] or [ ] key. If you make a mistake when entering special letters, use the [ ] or [ ] key and the [Backspace] key to delete the character. Then, enter the correct character. You can also delete all characters you have entered by pressing the C key. To continue entering alphabet characters, press the [Entry Mode] key to select the desired mode. Then, enter the character.
Clear
When you have nished entering the special letters, press the [OK] key.
10-7
10
Setting in Inches
When entering values in inches in the modes which require number entry, set the inch entry function to On in the Common Settings of the Additional Functions. You can make entry in inches when you press the [Inch] key on the screen which requires number entry. The example shows the inch entry in the Zoom Program mode.
Press the [1] [_] [1] [/] and [2] keys on the touch panel display in that order. Operation When User Restrictions are Enabled and How to Enter Alphabet Characters The entered values is displayed as shown on the right.
10
10-8
Setting in Inches
Appendix
11
11-2 11-2 11-5 11-5 11-6 11-8 11-8 11-8
CH APTER
Relation of Original Orientation and Paper Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9 Chart of Available Combination of Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10 Copy Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10 Mail Box Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
11-1
11
Appendix
Specications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Paper Deck-G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Finisher-F1/ Saddle Finisher-F2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Puncher Unit-B1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy Tray-C3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Card Reader-C1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specications
Specications are subject to change without notice for product improvement or future release.
Main Unit
Name Type Platen Photoconductive material
Appendix
Canon imageRUNNER 5000 Series Console Stationary A-si Electrostatic Transfer System Toner Projection System Heat Roller system Reading Writing Printing 256 Plain paper Paper drawer 1, 2 : 17-lb bond to 110-lb index (64 g/m2 to 200 g/m2) Paper drawer 3, 4 : 17-lb bond to 24-lb bond (64 g/m2 to 90 g/m2) Stack bypass : 17-lb bond to 110-lb index (64 g/m2 to 200 g/m2) Transparency*, Tracing paper*, Labels*, Heavy, Recycled, Color, Letterhead, Bond, 3-Hole Punch (*stack bypass selected) 600 dpi x 600 dpi approx. 1,200 dpi x 600 dpi approx. 2,400 dpi x 600 dpi
Copying system Developing system Fixing system Resolution
11
Number of tones Acceptable paper stock
Acceptable originals Maximum original size Paper sizes
Sheet, books, 3-dimensional objects (Up to 4.4-lb bond or 2 kg) 11"x17" Paper drawer 1, 2: LTR Paper drawer 3, 4: 11"x17"/ LGL/ LTR/ LTRR/ STMTR You can only change the sizes of the paper drawer 3. Stack bypass : 11"x17"/ LGL/ LTR/ LTRR/ STMTR Free-size: 4" x 5-7/8" to 11-5/8" x 17" (100 x 148 mm to 297 x 432 mm)
11-2
Specifications
Non-image areas
Leading edge: 1/8" (4.0 mm) Left and right side: 1/8" (2.5 mm) Trailing edge: 1/8" (2.0 mm) When main power is turned ON: 5 minutes max. Activation time from Sleep mode: 5 minutes max. Activation time from Energy Saver mode: None : 0 second 10% mode: approx. 50 sec. 25% mode: approx. 90 sec. 50% mode: approx. 180 sec. *Activation time from each mode is a rough standard until the machine is ready to copy after canceling the mode. Activation time may vary depending on the conditions under which the machine is used. (In all cases, at a room temperature of 68F.)
Warm-up time
First copy time Copy speed
Platen glass selected
: 3.8 seconds max.
Direct imageRUNNER 5000 11"x17" 30 cpm LGL 36 cpm LTR 50 cpm LTRR 39 cpm STMTR 50 cpm Reduction 11"x17" STMTR (50%) 50 cpm 11"x17" LTRR (64%) 39 cpm 11"x17" LGL (73%) 36 cpm LGL LTR (78%) 39 cpm Enlargement LGL 11"x17" (121%) 30 cpm LTRR 11"x17" (129%) 30 cpm STMT 11"x17" (200%) 30 cpm : Except the stack bypass.
Specifications
11-3
11
Appendix
Magnication
Direct 1:1 Reduction 1 : 0.789 1 : 0.733 1 : 0.647 1 : 0.500 1 : 0.250 Enlargement 1 : 1.214 1 : 1.294 1 : 2.000 1 : 4.000
(0.5%) (LGL LTR) (11"x17" LGL/ 11"x15" LTR) (11"x17" LTR) (11"x17" STMT) (LGL 11"x17") (LTR 11"x17") (STMT 11"x17")
11
Appendix
Paper feeding system
Paper drawer 1, 2 (1,500 sheets each) Paper drawer 3, 4 (550 sheets each) Stack bypass (stack bypass tray: 50 sheets 20-Ib bond (80 g/m2); stack approx. 1/4" (5 mm) high)
Automatic exposure control or manual exposure control
Exposure control Multiple copies Power source Max power consumption Dimensions (H x W x D) Installation space (W x D)
999 sheets max. 120 V AC, 60 Hz, 15 A 1.5 kW 44-3/4" x 25-3/8" x 29-1/4" (1,136 mm x 643 mm x 743 mm) 52-5/8" x 29-1/4" (1,335 mm x 743 mm) (Dimensions of eject tray and stack bypass tray are given for extended condition.) Approx. 462 lb (210 kg)
Weight
11-4
Specifications
Feeder
Originals Original paper weights Original tray capacity Original replacement speed Power source Power consumption Dimensions (H x W x D) Weight 11" x 17"/ LGL/ LTR/ LTRR/ STMT 13-lb bond to 32-lb bond (50 g/m2 to 128 g/m2) 100 sheets 55 sheets/minute (LTR) From main unit When active : 48 W max. When not active : 2.5 W max. 5-7/8" x 22-1/4" x 21-1/2" (149 mm x 565 mm x 545 mm) Approx. 30.8 lb (14 kg)
Appendix Specifications 11-5
Paper deck capacity Power source Power consumption Dimensions (H x W x D) Weight Acceptable paper size
3,500 sheets (20-lb bond (80 g/m2)) From main unit 40 W 22-5/8" x 12-3/4" x 23" (574 mm x 323 mm x 583 mm) Approx. 101 lb (46 kg) LTR
11
Paper Deck-G1
Finisher-F1/ Saddle Finisher-F2

Paper 17-lb bond to 110-lb index (64 g/m2 to 200 g/m2) Saddle Stitcher Unit* : 17-lb bond to 20-lb bond (64 g/m2 to 80 g/m2) (For cover sheets only* : 17-lb bond to 110-lb index (64 g/m2 to 200 g/m2)) [Non-collate mode] LTR/ STMTR : 5-3/4" (147 mm) (equivalent to 1,000 sheets 20-lb bond (80 g/m2)) 11"x17"/ LGL/ LTRR : 2-7/8" (74 mm) (equivalent to 500 sheets 20-lb bond (80 g/m2)) [Collate mode] [Group mode] LTR/ STMTR : 5-3/4" (147 mm) (equivalent to 1,000 sheets 20-lb bond (80 g/m2)) 11"x17"/ LGL/ LTRR : 2-7/8" (74 mm) (equivalent to 500 sheets 20-lb bond (80 g/m2)) [Staple mode] LTR : 30 sets or 4-3/8" (110 mm) (equivalent to 750 sheets 20lb bond (80 g/m2)) 11"x17"/ LGL/ LTRR : 30 sets or 2-7/8" (74 mm) (equivalent to 500 sheets 20lb bond (80 g/m2)) [Non-collate]/ [Collate]/ [Group], with different paper size 1-3/4" (44 mm) (equivalent to 300 sheets 20-lb bond (80 g/m2)) [Staple] with different paper size 30 sets or 7/8" (22 mm) (equivalent to 150 sheets 20-lb bond (80 g/m2)) [Saddle Stitch]* 1 to 5 sheets : 25 sets 6 to 10 sheets : 15 sets 11 to 15 sheets : 10 sets
Capacity per tray
11
11-6
Appendix
Specifications
Max. stapling capacity
Staple Unit LTR : 50 sheets 11"x17"/ LGL/ LTRR : 30 sheets Saddle Stitcher Unit * : 15 sheets 11"x17"/ LGL/ LTR/ LTRR Corner staple: 11"x17"/ LGL/ LTR/ LTRR Double staple: 11"x17"/ LTR 11"x17"/ LTRR
Available offset size Available staple size Available saddle stitch size*
Saddle Stitcher Folding Method* Roller pressure folding
Saddle Stitcher Folding mode* V-fold Power consumption Power source Dimensions (H x W x D) 170 W max. Finisher 41-3/8" x 26-3/8" x 24-1/4" (1,052 mm x 669 mm x 614 mm) Finisher + Puncher Unit-B1 41-3/8" x 29-3/8" x 24-1/4" (1,052 mm x 744.5 mm x 614 mm) Finisher-F1/ Saddle Finisher-F2 61-3/8" x 29-1/4" (1,559 mm x 743 mm) Finisher-F1/ Saddle Finisher-F2 + Puncher Unit-B1 64-3/8" x 29-1/4" (1,634 mm x 743 mm) Saddle Finisher-F2 (The width includes necessary space for removing paper jams.) 72-5/8" x 29-1/4" (1,844 mm x 743 mm) Finisher-F1: Approx. 70.5 lb (32 kg) Saddle Finisher-F2: Approx. 114 lb (52 kg) Finisher-F1 + Puncher Unit-B1: Approx. 82.4 lb (37.4 kg) Saddle Finisher-F2 + Puncher Unit-B1: Approx. 126 lb (57.4 kg)
Appendix 11-7
From main unit
Installation location (W x D)
Weight
*Saddle Finisher-F2 only.
Specifications
11
Puncher Unit-B1
Paper Hole punching system 17-lb bond to 110-lb index (64 g/m2 to 200 g/m2) Sequential processing system
Punch hole quantity, hole diameter 2 holes/ 3 holes, 80.5 mm Distance between punch holes 3 holes: 4-1/4" (108mm) 2 holes: 2-3/4" (70 mm) Paper size in which holes can be punched 3 holes: 11"x17"/ LTR 2 holes: LGL/ LTRR Punch waste tray capacity Power consumption Power source Dimensions (H x W x D) Weight Approx. 3,000 sheets (20-lb bond (80 g/m2)) 120W max. From the Finisher 34-7/8" x 3" x 24-1/4" (886 mm x 75.5 mm x 614.4 mm) Approx. 11.9 lb (5.4 kg)
11
Appendix
Copy Tray-C3
Capacity Dimensions (H x W x D) Weight 250 sheets (20-lb bond (80 g/m2)) 4" x 18-3/8" x 13-3/8" (100 mm x 465 mm x 340 mm) Approx. 1.4 lb (670 g)
Card Reader-C1
Card to be Used Card readout method
Magnetic type card, Optical type card Magnetic/Optical readout Inserting Direction
Magnetic Card Reading Direction Store/ Replay Power Source Size (H x W x D) Weight Replay From main unit 1-1/8 x 3-1/2 x 4 (32 mm x 88 mm x 100 mm) 10.4 oz (295 g)
11-8
Specifications
Relation of Original Orientation and Paper Orientation

When you set the left-side stapling NOTE
Please use this chart when printing on paper with logos etc., printed beforehand.
Confidential
Output example Original/ paper orientation, settings Orientation in paper drawer 1, 2
Confidential Confidential Confidential
Confidential Confidential
Confidential
laitnedifnoC
Orientation in paper drawer 3, 4 Orientation in stack bypass/ paper deck
laitnedifnoC
laitnedifnoC laitnedifnoC
Confidential
Confidential
Confidential Confidential
Confidential
Orientation on the platen glass

Corner :TopLeft Double :Left Corner :TopRight Double :Right Corner :TopLeft Corner :TopLeft Double :Left
Staple setting
Orientation in the feeder

Corner :TopLeft Double :Left
Staple setting
Corner :TopLeft Double :Left
Corner :TopRight Either On or Off (Set to On when paper orientation in paper drawers is vertical.)
Corner :TopRight Double :Right
Auto Orientation setting
Either On or Off
Either On or Off
Either On or Off
Relation of Original Orientation and Paper Orientation
11-9
11
laitnedifnoC laitnedifnoC
Appendix
LTR
11"x17", LGL
LTR
laitnedifnoC
11"x17", LGL
Chart of Available Combination of Functions

The chart shows how the settings will be when you want to set a function different from a function already set.
Copy Function

Combination unavailable Priority to latter-set mode Priority to Image Combination, Image Separation, and Booklet mode (Ratio can be changed)
Function intend to set Enlargement Zoom Designation XY Zoom Auto Zoom mode Zoom Program Entire Image Automatic Exposure Control Printed Image Photo Text Text/Photo Automatic Paper Selection Automatic Paper Selection, Auto Orientation Auto Drawer Switching Stack Bypass Collate Group Rotate Collating Rotate Grouping Offset Collate Offset Group Staple Saddle Stitch Hole Punch Interrupt Copy Reserve Copy 1 2-Sided 2 2-Sided 2 1-Sided Book 2-Sided
*1 You cannot combine these modes when free size is selected.
11-10
Functi on alr eady Enlarg set ement Zoom Design ation XY Zo om Auto Z oom m od Zoom Progra e m Entire Image Autom ati Printe c Exposure d Imag Contro e l Photo Text Text/P ho Autom to ati Automati c Paper Se lec cP Auto D aper Selection, tion Au ra Stack wer Switchin to Orientation Bypas g s Collate Group Rotate C Rotate ollating G Offset rouping Collate Offset G Staple roup Saddle S Hole P titch un Interru ch pt Reserv Copy e 1 2-S Copy id 2 2-S ed id 2 1-S ed ided Book 2-Side d
*1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1
Combination available
11
Appendix
Function intend to set Two-page Separation Image Combination Image Separation Original Frame Erase Book Frame Erase Binding Erase Right Margin Left Margin Top Margin Bottom Margin Shift Front Cover Sheet Insertion (Printed/Blank) Chapter Page Transparency Interleaving Booklet Booklet/ Saddle Stitch Front Cover (Printed/Blank) Sample Set Different Size Originals Job Build Sharpness Nega/Posi Image Repeat Mirror Image
Functi on alr e a dy Enlarg set ement Zoom Design ation XY Zo om Auto Z oom m od Zoom Progra e m Entire Image Autom ati Printe c Exposure d Imag Contro e l Photo Text Text/P ho Autom to ati Automati c Paper Se lec cP Auto D aper Selection, tion Au ra Stack wer Switchin to Orientation Bypas g s Collate Group Rotate C Rotate ollating G Offset rouping Collate Offset G Staple roup Saddle S Hole P titch un Interru ch pt Reserv Copy e 1 2-S Copy id 2 2-S ed id 2 1-S ed ided Book 2-Side d
*1 *1 *1
*4 *4 *4 *4 *4 *4
*1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1
*2 *3
*1
*2 You can set the Sample Set mode as the Interrupt mode. *3 You can set the Sample Set mode as the Reserve Copy mode. *4 You cannot combine these modes when the Different Size Originals mode is set.
11-11
11
Appendix
Function intend to set Enlargement Zoom Designation XY Zoom Auto Zoom mode Zoom Program Entire Image Automatic Exposure Control Printed Image Photo Text Text/Photo Automatic Paper Selection Automatic Paper Selection, Auto Orientation Auto Drawer Switching Stack Bypass Collate Group Rotate Collating Rotate Grouping Offset Collate Offset Group Staple Collate Saddle Stitch Hole Punch Interrupt Copy Reserve Copy 1 2-Sided 2 2-Sided 2 1-Sided Book 2-Sided
Appendix
11
*5 You cannot make Interrupt copy while copying with the Sample Set mode, nor while changing the settings after the Sample Set has been made. *6 You cannot reserve a copy job while copying with the Sample Set mode, nor while changing the settings after the Sample Set has been made.
11-12
Functi on alr e a dy Two-p set age S eparati Image on Comb ination Image S Origin eparation al Fram e Eras Book F e Bindin rame Erase g Eras e Right Ma Left M rgin arg Top M in arg Bottom in Margin Shift Front Co Sheet ver In Chapte sertion (Pri nted/B r lank) Transp Page arency Interle Bookle a ving t Bookle t/ Sad dle Sti Front tch Co Samp ver (Printed le /Blank ) Differe Set nt Job Bu Size Origin als ild Sharp ne Nega/P ss o Image si Repea t Mirror Image
*1 *1 *1 *4 *4 *4 *4 *4 *4 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *5 *6
Function intend to set Two-page Separation Image Combination Image Separation Original Frame Erase Book Frame Erase Binding Erase Right Margin Left Margin Top Margin Bottom Margin Shift Front Cover Sheet Insertion (Printed/Blank) Chapter Page Transparency Interleaving Booklet Booklet/ Saddle Stitch Front Cover (Printed/Blank) Sample Set Different Size Originals Job Build Sharpness Nega/Posi Image Repeat Mirror Image
Functi on alr e a dy Two-p set age S eparati Image on Comb ination Image Separa tio Origin al Fram n eE Book F rame E rase Bindin g Eras rase e Right Margin Left M argin Top M arg Bottom in Margin Shift Front Co Sheet ver In Chapte sertion (Pri nted/B r lank) Transp Page are Bookle ncy Interlea ving t Bookle t/ Sad dle Sti Add C tch o Samp ver (Printed le Set /Blank ) Differe nt Size Origin Job Bu als ild Sharp ne Nega/P ss o Image si R epea t Mirror Image

*7
*7
*7 You cannot combine these modes when the automatic paper selection is selected. When selecting the paper manually, you can combine these modes.
11-13
11
Appendix
Mail Box Function

Function intend to set Platen glass scanning Feeder scanning Document size Auto Select Document size Manual Select Record size Auto Select Record size Manual Select Enlargement Zoom Designation XY Zoom Auto Zoom Zoom Program Automatic Exposure Control Photo mode/ Printed Image Photo mode/ Photo Text Text/Photo 1-Sided Scanning 2-Sided Scanning Two-page Separation Image Combination Original Frame Erase Book Frame Erase Binding Erase Booklet Scanning Different Size Originals Job Build Sharpness Nega/Posi
Appendix
11
*8 You can combine these modes when the Job Build mode is set.
11-14
Functi on alr e a dy Platen set glass sc Feede r scan anning n ing Docum e Docum nt size Auto S ent siz e Man elect Record ual s Record ize Auto Se Select le Enlarg size Manua ct l Selec ement t Zoom Design ation XY Zo om Auto Z o Zoom om Pro Autom gram ati Photo c Exposure mode/ Contro Pri l Photo mode/ nted Image Photo Text Text/P ho 1-Side to d Scan ning 2-Side d Two-p Scanning age S eparati Image on C Origin ombination al Fram e Eras Book F e Bindin rame Erase g Eras e Bookle tS Differe canning nt Job Bu Size Origin als ild Sharp ness Nega/P osi
*8 *8
Index
1 to 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 On 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 On 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 On 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 2-Sided . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 1-Sided . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2-Sided . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38 3-39 3-33 3-33 3-34 2-38 2-43 2-40
A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35, 4-14 Adding Toner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 Additional Functions Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Additional Functions key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Additional Functions Settings Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Adjusting a Paper Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 Adjustment/Cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31 Audible Tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Auto. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20, 4-15 Auto Clear Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Auto Collate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37 Auto Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40 Auto Paper Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Auto Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Auto Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Auto XY Zoom. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
B
Back Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Basic Features Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Binding Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31, 4-35 Black toner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 Book Frame Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28, 4-34 Book 2-Sided . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45 Booklet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9, 4-72 Booklet Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29 Box Selection Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Index
11-15
11
Appendix
Box Set/ Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46 Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
C
Cancel Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Card Reader-C1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13 Change Auto Clear Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27 Change Auto Sleep Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26 Clear key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Clip holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Collate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48 Common Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 Control Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Control panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Control panel power switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Copy Exposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32 COPY key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Copy Ratio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16, 4-15 Copy Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37 Copy Tray-C3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34 Counter Check key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Cover/Job Separator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69 Cover/Sheet Insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
11
Appendix
D
Daily Timer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29 Dark. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32, 4-12 Date & Time Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24 Department ID Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58 Device Information Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-72 Device Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27 Different Size Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-43, 4-43 Display contrast dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Document Size Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 Done Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10 Duplexing Transport unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
11-16
Index
E
Energy Consumption in Sleep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 Energy Saver key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Energy Saver Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14 Entire Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 Error indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
F
Feeder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Feeder Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30 Feeder cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48, 4-63 Finisher-F1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Fixing Transport unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 Frame Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24, 4-29 Front cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 Function Key Wake Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
G
Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48 Guide Function Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Guide key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
H
Hole Punch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
I
ID key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Image Combination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33, 4-37 Image Orientation Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38 Image Repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62 Image Separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38 Inch Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 Initial Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Initialize Common Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23 Initialize Copy Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45 Interrupt key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Interrupt Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Index
11-17
11
Appendix
J
Job Build . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-45, 4-45 Job Duration Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
L
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32, 4-12 Loading Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Low-Power Mode Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30 LTRR/ STMT Original Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Appendix
M
MAIL BOX key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Mail Box Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46 Main Power indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Main power switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Manual Paper Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 Merge Documents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63 Mirror Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65 Mode Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48, 4-51, 4-77
11
N
Nega/Posi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-60, 4-47 Next Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Non-collate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49 Numeric keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
O
OK key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13 Original Frame Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26, 4-30 Original output area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Original supply tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
11-18
Index
P
Paper Deck-G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Paper drawer 1, 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Paper drawer 3, 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Paper Jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 Paper Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Paper stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 Photo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33, 4-13 Photo Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41 Platen glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 Preset Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16, 4-15 Printed Img. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33, 4-13 Printing Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18 Priority Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 Processing/Data indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Puncher Unit-B1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
R
Rear side of platen glass cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58 Report Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-75 Reserve Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Reserve Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Reset key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Right cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Rotate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
S
Saddle Finisher-F2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Saddle Stitch Position Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33 Saddle Stitcher Staple Repositioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32 Sample Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88 Sample Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54 SCAN key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Secured Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 Self-diagnostic (Error) Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32 Service Call Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37 Setting Conrmation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56 Sharpness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67, 4-49 Shift. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Index
11-19
11
Appendix
Slide guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Special Features Screen 1/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Special Features Screen 2/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Specications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2 Stack bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 StackBypass Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Standard Key Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35 Standard Local Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21 Standard Scan Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52 Standard Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42 Standard Stack Bypass Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19 Staple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49 Start key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Stop key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Store Paper Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12 System Manager Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55 System Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 System Monitor Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55
11
Appendix
T
Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33, 4-13 Text/Photo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33, 4-13 Time Until Unit Quiets Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28 Timer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24 Toner supply cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 Transparency Interleaving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Tray Designation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17 Two-page Separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2, 4-27 Two-sided Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38 Two-sided Originals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23 Two-sided Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67
U
Users Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-75
W
Wire Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
11-20
Index
X
XY Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25, 4-21
Z
Zoom. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24, 4-20 Zoom Designation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18, 4-16 Zoom Fine Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31 Zoom Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23, 4-20
Index
11-21
11
Appendix
System Management Mode of the imageRUNNER 5000 Series

The following pages regarding the use and operations of the System Management mode, should be cut out of the manual by the supervisor or the system manager. You can set restrictions to the System Settings of the Additional Functions or manage the settings set by other users by setting the System Settings of the Additional Functions. This mode is call the System Management mode. The operations which can be done in the System Management mode are as follows: Box Document Management Box Setting Management
Entering the System Management Mode

When Department ID Management is Enabled
Enter the System Manager ID in the [Department ID], and the System Password in the [Password] with the Numeric keys ( 0 - 9 ), and press the ID key. The machine enters the System Management Mode.
When Department ID Management is not Enabled
Press the
key.
Reset
1
Guide
2 5 8 0
3 6 9
Cle
?
4 7
Interrupt
ID
Press the [System Settings] key.
Enter the System Manager ID/ Password with the Numeric keys ( 0 - 9 ), and press the ID key. The machine enters the System Management Mode. NOTE
Enter the number stored under System Manager Settings. (See Setting/ Changing the System Manager ID and Password, on p. 6-55.)
Canceling the System Management Mode

Press the
ID
key.
Guide
1
?
2 5 8 0
3 6 9
Clear
The System Management Mode is canceled. NOTE

The System Management Mode is also canceled even when Auto Clear has taken place. The display returns to the screen of the function selected in the Auto Clear Setting.
4 7
Interrupt
ID
Processing /Data
Error
ii
Managing Box in the System Management Mode

You can operate the box documents stored by the users. For example, you can operate a box that the user has forgotten the password, erase unnecessary documents, or in case of need, access to box documents of other users.
Enter the System Management Mode.

Reset
1
Guide
2 5 8 0
3 6 9
Cle
?
4 7
Interrupt
ID
Press the
MAIL BOX
key.
COPY
MAIL BOX
SCAN
Proceed to operate the box. (See Chapter 4 Using the Mail Box Functions.)
iii
Changing the Box Settings in the System Management Mode

You can change the box settings restricted with a password. For example, you can initialize unnecessary box, or change the name of the box.
Press the NOTE
key.
Reset
1
Guide
2 5 8 0
3 6 9
Cle
When the machine is already in the System ManAdditional Functions agement mode, press the key and proceed to step 5.
?
4 7
Interrupt
ID
Press the [System Settings] key.
iv
When Department ID Management is enabled, enter the System Manager ID in the [Department ID], and the System Password in the [Password], with the Numeric keys ( 0 - 9 ), and press the ID key.
Enter the System Manager ID/ Password with the Numeric keys ( 0 - 9 ), and press the ID key. The machine enters the System Management Mode. NOTE
Enter the number stored under System Manager Settings. (See Setting/ Changing the System Manager ID and Password, on p. 6-55.)
Press the [Done] key. The display returns to the Additional Functions screen.
Press the [Mail Box Settings] key, and change the settings. (See Setting Specications of the Mail Box Function (Mail Box Settings), on p. 6-46.)
Check Sheet for the Periodic Inspection of the Breaker

This page should be cut out of the users guide and copied for future use. After cutting out of the users guide, store this page in a safe place near the machine.
How to Inspect the Breaker periodically

Follow the procedure described in the Periodic Inspection of the Breaker on p. 26 of the imageRUNNER 5000 Series Users Guide, once or twice a month.
How to Fill in this Check Sheet

Fill in the date of inspection, and the name of inspector. When the inspection nished normally, write a check mark under OK. If not, contact your service representative. (Also write a check mark under NG.)
Date of Inspection
Inspector
Result OK NG
Date of Inspection
Inspector
Result OK NG

Canon ImageRUNNER 5000 User Guide

Încărcat de

Informații document

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Canon ImageRUNNER 5000 User Guide

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Series

imageRUNNER 5000 Series

International Energy Star-Program

How This Manual is Organized

Useful Copy Functions

Using the Mail Box Functions

Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your Needs

Loading Paper and Adding Toner

How This Manual is Organized

Functions of This Machine and Related Manuals

How to Use this Machine Troubleshooting

For Remote UI Use

For Postscript/PCL Use

For Installing the Printer Driver, etc

For Installing the Printer Driver, etc

For Connecting and Setting the Network

Functions of This Machine and Related Manuals

Operation of the Machine and Terms Used in This Manual

Scanning an original to be copied, or scanning an original to be stored as data in a box.

Operation of the Machine and Terms Used in This Manual

Periodic Inspection of the Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Before You Start Using This Machine

Useful Copy Functions

Using the Mail Box Functions

Erasing a Document from a Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95

Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your Needs

Loading Paper and Adding Toner

How to Use This Manual

Making Copies of Facing Pages in a Book (Two-page Separation)

Useful Copy Functions

Copying Facing Pages onto Two Separate Sheets

1 Place your original on the platen glass and

2 Press the [Two-page Separation] key.

Making Copies of Facing Pages in a Book (Two-page Separation)

1 Section Title 2 Chapter Title 3 Description of modes and examples of

5 Subsection Title 6 Operation Instructions

How to Use This Manual

Symbols Used in This Manual

Key on control panel

Key on touch panel display

The keys which are to be operated are marked with

as shown below in this manual.

Symbols Used in This Manual

Maintenance and Inspections

DANGER- Laser radiation when open.

AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM.

DANGER- Laser radiation when open.

AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM.

DANGER- Laser radiation when open

DANGER- Laser radiation when open.

AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM.

Periodic Inspection of the Breaker

Periodic Inspection of the Breaker

Move the breaker lever to ON ( I side).

Press the main power switch to ON ( I side)

Periodic Inspection of the Breaker

Select a Safe Power Supply

Provide Adequate Installation Space

49" (1,244 mm)

85-1/8" (2,162 mm)

Moving the Machine

49" (1,244 mm)

What the imageRUNNER 5000 Series Can Do

Various Kinds of Copies